The Appreciation Of Poetry : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

అధ్యాయము 43

The Appreciation Of Poetry

Poetry అంటే ఏమిటి? Poetry అంటే ఏమిటి అనే విషయంపై చాలా మంది చాలా రాశారు. కాని ఎవరూ కూడా దానిని పూర్తిగా వివరించలేకపొయ్యారు. Poetry seems to elude all attempts to describe it. కాని ఏదో కొంత మనం poetry ని గురించి తెలుసుకోవాలి. దాని వలన కనీసం కొంతలో కొంత మనకు ఆ subject ను గురించి తెలుస్తుంది. దాని ప్రధానమైన లక్షణాలు అవగాహన లోనికి వస్తాయి.

Poetry కి verse కి మధ్యనున్న సంబంధాలు ముందు చర్చిద్దాం. Poetry యొక్క form ను verse అంటారు. రచయితలు verse form లో poetry ని రాస్తారు. కొన్ని poetry కాకుండానే verses ఉంటాయి. verses poetry యొక్క body గా ఉంటవి.

Verse ని ఒక ప్రత్యేక బాణీలో రాస్తారు. Verse formation కు prose formation కు చాలా తేడా ఉంటుంది. Verse చెవి మాత్రమే. కన్ను కాదు. Verse ను చదివినపుడు దానికీ prose కూ ఉన్న తేడా తెలుస్తుంది. Verse అంటే ఒక విధంగా శ్లోకము అని కూడా అర్ధం చెప్పుకొనవచ్చును. ఇచ్చట ఆ తేడాలు
గమనించండి:

The Appreciation Of Poetry Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

Read and Learn more Written Composition

(a) “The untrodden snow lay all bloodless on Linden, when the sun was low;
and the flow of Iser, rolling rapidly, was dark as winter.”

(b) “On Linden, when the sun was low, All bloodless lay the untrodden snow: And dark as winter was the flow Of Iser, rolling rapidly.”
భావములో మాత్రము పై రెండు passages ఒకే విధంగా ఉన్నవి. పదాలు కూడా ఒకే రకం.

(c) ఇచ్చట Campbell’s poem అయిన “Hohenlinden” ఉన్నది. No. (i) అదే మాటలు ఇచ్చట కూడా ఉపయోగింపబడ్డాయి. కాని చదివేటప్పుడు తేడా తెలుస్తుంది..
ఈ తేడాల యొక్క వివరణ ఇలా ఉంటుంది.

(1) Regular Rhythm: Rhyme ను చదివేటప్పుడు regular beat of sound వినిపిస్తుంది. అది soldiers యొక్క marching (కవాతు) వలె ఉంటుంది. Dancing చేయు నాట్యకత్తెల అడుగుల సవ్వడిలా (Foot work) ఉంటుంది. Prose విభాగంలో పాద ధ్వని లాంటిది ఉండదు. Rhyme లో కవి syllable ధ్వనులను ఒక ప్రణాలిక ప్రకారం సమాంతర దూరాలలో arrange చేస్తాడు. మొదటి line లో ఈ sound syllables ను italics print లో పెడితే ఇది అర్ధమౌతుంది. ప్రతి రెండవ syllable ధ్వనిని మొదటి దాని కంటె పెంచుకుంటూ పోవాలి. అప్పుడు rhythm చక్కగా వస్తుంది.
“On Linden when the sun was low”
Poetry లో శృతి పెరగడం తగ్గడం, అవి చక్కని విరామముల మధ్య వినబడటం ఇదంతా కూడా dance program లో ధ్వనులు పెరుగుదల తరుగుదల వలె ఒక బాణీ ప్రకారం జరుగుతుంది. దీనినే rhythm అంటారు. ఈ rhythm అనునది verse లో ప్రధానపాత్ర వహిస్తుంది.

(2) Rhyme : Stanza మొదటి మూడు lines చివర ఒకే sound ఉండవలయును. (low, snow, flow etc.) పదములకు ఒకే vowel sound ఉండి, ఒకే consonant sound తో అంతమైనపుడు rhyming sound వచ్చును.

ఉదా: keep, peep, jump, lump; hate, late, crew, few ; glide, slide మొదలైనవి. verse కు rhyming arrangement అక్కరలేదు. ఎందుకంటే సాధారణంగా verse లోనే rhyming arrangement ఉంటుంది. Rhyme కు రెండు ప్రధాన లక్షణములు ఉన్నవి. అది ఆహ్లాదకరమైన స్వరాలు కల్పించడం ద్వారా verse ను సంగీతమయం చేస్తుంది. ఈ arrangement ద్వారా verse చాలా కాలం మనగలుగుతుంది.

Stanzas కొన్ని పేజీలలోనున్న “The Daffodils” ను చూడండి. Verse ఎలా ఉంటుందో అర్ధమౌతుంది. Poem యూనిట్లుగా విభజింపబడి యుండటం, ఆ units అన్నీకూడా ఒకే form లో ఉండటం గమనించగలరు. ప్రతి unit కు ఆరు lines ఉన్నవి. మొదటి line కు మూడవ లైనుకు rhyming arrangement ఉన్నది. రెండవ దానికి 4వ దానికి same arrangement ఉన్నది. ఈ units ను stanzas అంటారు. చాలా వరకు poetry ని stanzas form లోనే రాస్తారు.

Verse ప్రధానమైనది rhythm. తరువాత rhythm మరియు stanzas కలిసి ఉండవచ్చును. ఈ నిబంధనలలో rhythrn చాలా అవసరం. Verse లేక poetry గాని rhythm లేకుండా ఉండదు. చాలా poems విషయంలో rhyme మరియు stanza forms ఉన్నప్పటికి, ఇవి poetry కి తప్పని సరిగా అవసరం అని చెప్పడానికి వీలులేదు. చాలా poems blank verse form లో రాయబడినవి ఉన్నవి. ఈ blank verse లో ప్రతి line లో పది syllables ఉంటాయి. కాని వాటికి చివర rhymes ఉండవు.

ఇంతవరకు మనం verse కు poetry ఉన్న సంబంధాలను గురించి తెలుసుకున్నాం. అసలు poetry అంటే ఏమిటో ఇప్పుడు తెలుసుకుందాం :-

(1) Music – Poetry లో ప్రధానమైనది verbal music. Poet స్వతహాగా ఆహ్లాదకరమైన ధ్వనులను ఇచ్చే పదాలను select చేసుకుంటాడు. మాటలను ఒకదాని పక్కన ఒకటి అమరిక చేయునపుడు వాని శృతిలో (sound) పరస్పర ఏకత్వం ఉండునట్లు చూసుకుంటాడు. దీనినే word music అంటారు. కధా వస్తువునకు (subject) సమతూకంగా ఉండేటట్లు ఈ word music ను సరిదిద్దుకుంటాడు. ఈ musical sound కు కధావస్తువు యొక్క భావానికి ఇలా సమతూకం ఏర్పడుతుంది. ఈ సమతూకం వలన poet యొక్క భావం మనకు బాగా అవగాహన అవుతుంది.

Verbal music అనేది కేవలం words యొక్క musical sound పైననే కాక rhythm (పద ధ్వనుల అమరిక పైన కూడా ఆధారపడుతుంది. చక్కని పదాల తియ్యని స్వరాలు ఆహ్లాదకరమైన rhythm కలిపి poetry కి music ను అందించును. ఇచ్చట Dryden రాసిన “Song for St. Cecilia’s Day” అనే poem నుండి రెండు verses ఉన్నవి. First verse లోని rapid rhythm అచట వివరించిన war alarm ను చక్కగా చూపించినది. రెండవ line లోని ప్రశాంతమైన rhythm అచట ఉన్న ఆహ్లాదకరమైన soft music కు
సరిపోయింది.
“The trumpet’s loud clangour
Excites us to arms,
With shrill notes of anger,
And mortal alarms.
The double double double beat
Of the thundering drum
Cries, Hark! the foes come;
Charge, charge, ’tis too late to retreat
The soft complaining flute,
In dying notes, discovers
The woes of hopeless lovers,
Whose dirge is whisper’d by the warbling lute.”
ఇచ్చట poets తమ music effects ఎలా సాధిస్తారు అనే విషయం పరిశీలిద్దాం:

(a) Rhyme : పదాలు ఒక దానికొకటి కలిసి సంయుక్తంగా rhyme చేసినపుడు musical sound వస్తుంది. ఇందువలననే poetry లో rhyming ను విస్తృతంగా వాడతారు. ఈ verse లో ఉన్న rhyme ను చూడండి
“Strew on her roses, roses,
And never a spray of yew,
In quiet she reposes:
Ah I would that I did too!”
(M. Arnold)
Internal rhymes (అనగా ఒకే line లో rhyming effect ను సృష్టించుట) ఇవి కూడా చక్కని musical
effect ను సృష్టించును.
‘The ice was here, the ice was there,
The ice was all around:
It cracked and growled, and roared and howled.
Like noises in a swound !”
(Coleridge)

(b) Vowel and Consonant Sounds : Open vowels మరియు soft consonant ను కలిగియున్న words (like_i, m, n, v, w z etc., ) చక్కని, మృదువైన మరియు ఆహ్లాదకరమైన music ను సృష్టించును.
“Season of mists and mellow fruitfulness.”
‘Then in a wailful choir the small gnats mourn.” “To dream and dream, like yonder amber light.”. “The murmurous haunt of flies on summer eves.”
(Keats) (Keats)
(Tennyson) (Keats)

(c) Onomatopoeia – ఒక పదము యొక్క sound నేరుగా అర్థాన్ని ఇచ్చునపుడు, అట్టి figure of speech ని ఈ పేరుతో పిలుస్తారు.
e.g., roar, bang, crash, clap, bump, bubble, screen, pop, moan, hum, murmur etc., Poet శబ్దముల గురించి మాట్లాడేటప్పుడు సందర్భాన్నిబట్టి ఆయా పదాలను ఉపయోగిస్తాడు. ఉదాహరణకు :-
The moan of doves in immemorial elms
And murmuring of innumerable bees.”
(Tennyson)
పైన ఇవ్వబడిన poem పావురాల కుహకుహులు, తుమ్మెదల జుంకారాలు వినిపిస్తుంది కదా? සුයි ఎలా సాధ్యం? Onomatopoeia శబ్దాలైన moan, murmur వలన సాధ్యమయ్యింది. consonants అయిన ‘m’ మరియు ‘n’ శబ్దాల (e.g.. immemorial, innumerable) వలన ఇంకా వినసొంపుగా ఉంది.

(d) Alliteration – ఇది ఇంకొక రకం figure of speech. దీనిని poetry లో వాడతారు. ఇది ఒకే consonant తో ప్రారంభమయ్యే రెండు పదాలను ఒకే చోటికి చేర్చుతుంది.
“The fair breeze below, the white foam flew                                      (Coleridge)
The furrow followed free.”
ఇచ్చట ‘ f’ sound గాలివీచే sound కు చక్కని పోలిక ఉంది.
“I hear lake water lapping with tow sounds by the shore.”                (Yeats)
ఉదాహరణకు :
ఇచ్చట ‘I’ sounds మరియు ‘sh’ sounds అచ్చటి చిన్న చిన్న అల శబ్దాలకు సరిపోవుచున్నవి.
A reeling road. a rolling road, that rambles round the shire.”            (Chesterton)
ఇచ్చట ‘ ‘ sound అచ్చటను పొడవాటి రోడ్డున వర్ణించడానికి ఉపయోగపడింది.

(e) Repetition-  కొన్ని phrases ను గాని కొన్ని పదాలనుగాని repeat చెయ్యడంవలన భావాన్ని విపులీకరించడానికే కాక musical ప్రభావాన్ని కూడా పెంపొందించును.
“The woods decay, the woods decay and, fall.”                              (Tennyson)
“What hope of answer, or redress?
Behind the veil, behind the veil..”                                                    (Tennyson)
“A wearytime! A weary time !
How glazed each weary eye !”                                                        (Coleridge)
“In ever climbing up a climbing wave”.
“The western tide crept up along the sand.                                    (Tennyson)
And o’er and o’er the sand.”
And round and round the sand.”                                                      (Kingsley)

(f) Refrains – Refrain కూడా ఒక విధమైన repetition అవుతుంది. కొన్ని verses లో ఒక line ను A line లోని భాగాన్ని గాని మరల repeat చెయ్యడం జరుగుతుంది. దీనిని burden or refrain అంటారు.

(2) Vision. (దృక్పథము) Poetry లో రెండవ ప్రాధాన్యత కలిగినటు వంటిది. గొప్ప కవికి తన దృష్టిని బహుదూరము సారించగల శక్తి ఉంటుంది. సత్యాన్ని అతడు తీవ్రంగా అన్వేషించి గమనించగలడు. ఆధ్యాత్మికమైన దృష్టి అతని ఆలోచనలో ఉంటుంది. మామూలు వ్యక్తులు బాహ్యప్రపంచాన్ని తమ పంచేంద్రియములతో గమనించగలరు. పంచేంద్రియములకు అతీతమైన భావాలను వారు గ్రహించలేరు. కాని కవులు తమ అంతర్మథన శక్తి ద్వారా కనిపించే దృశ్యాలకు అవతల ఉన్న అనేక సత్యాలను గ్రహించగలరు. అనేక విషయాలను వారు తమ సూక్ష్మదృష్టితో గ్రహించగలరు. ఉన్నతశ్రేణికి చెందిన కవిత్వము యావత్తూ కూడా, కవి యొక్క ఊహాజనితమే. Wordsworth సృజనాత్మకత లేని వ్యక్తిని గురించి ఒక పద్యం రాశారు. అతని పేరు Peter Bell. తన కంటికి కనిపించునది తప్ప ఇంక దేనినీ చూడలేదు అని ఇచ్చట భావము. అతనికి ఒక దృక్పథము అంటూ ఏమీలేదు.
“A primrose by a river’s brim
A yellow primrose’ was to him,
And it was nothing more.”
Primrose అనునది ఒక ఎడారి పూవు. దానిని గురించి Wordsworth గారు ఇలా రాశారు:
To me the meanest flower that blows can give
Thoughts that do often lie too deep for tears.
Poet వాస్తవానికి వ్యక్తిత్వాన్ని ఇస్తాడు. మామూలు సంఘటనలను, వస్తువులను మనం పరిశీలనా దృష్టితో చూడడానికి అతను మనకు తోడ్పడతారు. ఒక వాక్యాన్ని చూడండి :
“Apparelled in celestial light, the glory and the freshness of a dream.”

గొప్ప కవులు రాసిన poetry లో ఒక సందేశము ఉంటుంది. ఆ కవిత్వములో చెప్పిన దాని కంటే ఎంతో దానిలో దాగి ఉంటుంది. ఒకటి రెండు సార్లు చదివితే గాని దానిలోతు మనకు అంతుపట్టదు.

(3) Imagery : ఊహాజనితమైన చిత్రాలను మనం images అని అంటాము. నేర్పుగా పదాలను వాడినపుడు దీనిని imagery అని అంటాము. కంటికి కనిపించని భావాలను కవి కంటికి కనిపించునట్లు poetry లో చూపగలడు. ఇది అతని ఊహాశక్తికి నిదర్శనం. వచన కావ్యముకంటే, poetry ఈ పాత్రను గొప్పగా పోషించగలదు. Poetry కేవలం మాటలతోనే కాకుండా pictures తో మాట్లాడుతుంది. Poet యొక్క pictures వాస్తవ ప్రపంచం నుండి మనస్సులో గీసిన చిత్రాలు. మానసికమైన ఊహాచిత్రాలను మూడు విధాలుగా చిత్రిస్తాడు.

(a) By Description (వర్ణన ద్వారా): ఇతర prose writers వలెనే కవికూడా తన వర్ణనను మాటలతోనే చేస్తాడు. ఇచట Gray గారు రచించిన ఒక వర్ణన చూడండి:
‘The curfew tolls the knell of parting day.
The lowing herd wind slowly o’er the lea, The ploughman homeward plods his weary way. And leaves the world to darkness and to me. Now fades the glimmering landscape on the sight, And all the air a solemn stillness holds. Save where the beetle wheels his droning flight,
And drowsy tinklings lull the distant folds.”
(పద ప్రయోగములతో చేసిన వర్ణనల కొరకు ఈ క్రింది poem చూడండి. “The Sands of Dee” (2nd verse); “Hohenlinden”, “Rain in Summer.”)

(b) By certain Figures of Speech such as simile, metaphor, and personification about which you have learnt in Chapter 29. మీరు చదివినట్లుగా figures of speech కి చెందిన simile, metaphor మరియు personification అను వర్ణనలపైన గూడా poetry తన భావోన్నతికి ఆధారపడుతుంది. Poet ఎప్పుడు కూడా ఒక దానిని పోల్చిచెప్పడానికి ఇంకొక దానిపై ఆధారపడతాడు. ఇచ్చట image ని (ఊహాచిత్రాన్ని) ఆధారంగా తీసుకుంటాడు.

(c) By Picturesque Epithets. కవి మనస్సులో ఒక కీలక పదం ద్వారా గాని, phrase ద్వారాగాని, తన ఊహాచిత్రాన్ని నిర్మిస్తాడు. ఇచ్చటనున్న adjective epithets ను చూడండి. (సార్ధక నామము) :
“All in a hot and copper sky,
The bloody sun, at noon.”                                        (Coleridge)

పై రెండు lines లో ఉన్న రెండు epithets ఆకాశము యొక్క colour ను ఎంత చక్కగా వర్ణించినవి ! (4) Emotion. (ఉద్వేగము) : Emotion అనునది poetry కి ప్రధానంగా కావలసిన మూడవ అంశము. Prose రచనలో ఎక్కువ భాగము మెదడుకు సంబంధించిన వాటిలో కేంద్రీకరించి ఉంటుంది. Poetry హృదయంపై కేంద్రీకరించి ఉంటుంది. ఇది prose కు, poetry కు ఉన్న తేడా. కావున poetry ఉద్వేగాన్ని అనగా భావోద్వేగాన్ని హృదయంలో పెంపొందిస్తుంది. ఈ క్రింది lines ఉద్వేగం లేకుండా ఎవరు చదవగలరో
చూడండి
“And the stately ships go on
To their haven under the hill;
But O for the touch of a vanish’d hand,
And the sound of a voice that is still!”                     (Tennyson)

కాని ఉద్వేగమే ఉద్వేగాన్ని పెంపొందిస్తుంది. కవిత్వాన్ని అల్లేటప్పుడు కవి యొక్క భావనా ప్రపంచంలో ఏ మాత్రం ఉద్వేగం రాకపోయినా కవిత్వంలో ఉద్వేగం ఉండదు. కావున పాఠకులలో కూడా చలనం ఉండదు. సంక్షిప్తంగా చెప్పాలంటే, poetry కా ప్రధానంగా కావలసినవి music (భావయుక్తమైన సంగీతము) vision (ఒక దృక్పధము), emotion (ఉద్వేగము). కావున poetry తన imagination (ఊహాశక్తి) నుండి ఉద్భవిస్తుంది; ఉద్వేగంతో ఉవ్వెత్తున పైకి లేస్తుంది. ఒక సంగీత పరమైన మాటల సమ్మేళనంతో తన భావాన్ని వెలిబుచ్చుతుంది. Poetry కి అమాంతం మనం పూర్తి నిర్వచనాన్ని ఇవ్వలేము. దాని ప్రధాన లక్షణాలేమిటో వానిని మాత్రం
వివరించగలం.

Wordsworth గారు రచించిన “Daffodils” ను ఇచ్చట పరిశీలిద్దాం: I wandered lonely as a cloud
That floats on high o’er vales and hills,
-When all at once | saw a crowd,
A host of golden daffodils. Beside the lake, beneath the trees, Fluttering and dancing in the breeze. Continuous as the stars that shine
And twinkle on the milky way. They stretched in never-ending line Along the margin of a bay: Ten thousand saw I at a glance
Tossing their heads in sprightly dance. The waves beside them danced, but they Outdid the sparkling waves in glee;
A Poet could not but be gay
In such a jocund company!
I gazed – and gazed-but little thought
What wealth the show to me had brought.
For oft when on my couch I lie
In vacant or in pensive mood,
They flash upon that inward eye
Which is the bliss of solitude;
And then my heart with pleasure fills,
And dances with the daffodils.

Appreciation Of The Poem
(పద్య రచన యొక్క అవగాహన)

(1) Substance. మొదట పద్యాన్ని పూర్తిగా చదవాలి. తరువాత మనలను మనం ఈ విధంగా ప్రశ్నించుకోవాలి. ఇదంతా ఏమిటి? ప్రధానాంశం ఏమిటి? కవి ఏమి చెబుతున్నాడు?

ఒక రోజు కవి ఒక సరస్సు పక్కగా నడుస్తూ ఉంటాడు. వసంత ఋతువు. చల్లనిగాలి ఆహ్లాదకరంగా వీచుచున్నది. ఒక దృశ్యాన్ని చూస్తాడు. దాని అందం అతనిని ఆనందంతో ముంచెత్తుతుంది. హృదయం ఉప్పొంగి పోతుంది. కొన్ని వేల daffodils పుష్పాలు అతని మనోనేత్రాన్ని తెరుస్తాయి. పక్కనే చెఱుక్కుమని సరస్సులోని నీరు పరుగెత్తుతూ ఉంటుంది. దీనిని కవి “Fluttering and dancing” గా వర్ణిస్తాడు. Fluttering అనగా యిచ్చట రెపరెపలాడుట. అతను సంతోషంలో మునిగిపోతాడు. కాని ఆ సమయంలో అతనికి ఇతంతా తన జీవితానికి భాగస్వామ్యం అని తోచదు. తరువాత చాలా సార్లు ఈ దృశ్యం పదేపదే అతని మనోనేత్రం ముందు సాక్షాత్కరిస్తుంది. అతన్ని తన్మయత్వం చేస్తుంది.

(2) Language. ఈ daffodils poem చాలా simple భాషలో ఉంటుంది. పదగాంభీర్యం ఏమీ లేదు. Daffodils యొక్క Lilly జాతి మొక్కకు చెందినది. ఈ మొక్కలు బ్రిటన్ లోని చిట్టడవులలో పెరుగుతాయి.

(3) Imagery.
(a) మొదటి మూడు పద్యాలలో అనంతమైన daffodils సరస్సు పక్కన నేలపై పరిచినట్లు ఉన్న దృశ్యం వస్తుంది. సూర్యకిరణాలు వాని పైబడి అవి మిణుక్కు మిణుక్కు మని మెరుస్తూ ఉంటాయి. మొక్కలు గాలికి ఊగుతూ సూర్యకాంతిలో మెరుస్తూ నాట్యం చేస్తున్నట్లుగా ఉంటుంది.

(b) ఇచ్చట రెండు similes ఉన్నవి. Simily (simile అనగా ఉపమానాలంకారము) ఒంటరిగా ఉన్న మబ్బు, ఏకాంతముగానున్న కవి, మొదటి దశ. అనంతముగా కంటి చూపు ఆనినంత వరకు నేలపై పరచినట్లుగా ఉన్న daffodils దృశ్యము మరియు ఆకాశమంతా నిండిన అనంతకోటి నక్షత్రాల సమూహము రెండవ దశ. ఈ వర్ణన రెండవ పద్యములో ఉంటుంది..

(c) అదే రెండు, మూడు పద్యములలో personification (ఒక అచేతనమైన వస్తువును person గా గుర్తించి చెప్పుట) భావము కూడా ఉన్నది. ఇచ్చట daffodil పుష్పాలు ఆనందోత్సాహముతో తలలు ఆడిస్తూ మనుష్యులలాగా ఊగిపోవుచున్నవి అని అర్థం.
ఒకే సారి పదివేల పుష్పాలను చూశాను అంటాడు కవి. దీనిని English లో hyperbole అంటారు. ఇది కవి వర్ణణాంశంలో సహజంగా ఉండే అతిశయోక్తి. దానిని సారస్వతంగా తీసుకోవడానికి వీలులేదు.

(4) Sound effects
(a) మొదటి stanza లోని 6వ line లోని సత్వర భావానికి (quickness) దానికి ముందున్న lines లోని ప్రశాంతతకు ఉన్న తేడా ఎంతో poetic భావాన్ని ఇస్తుంది.

(b) నాలుగవ stanza లోని 6వ line లో alliteration భావము ప్రస్ఫుటంగా కనిపిస్తుంది. Alliteration అనగా రెండు పదములలోని మొదటి అక్షరములు అదే శబ్ధమును వినిపించుట. Ex. “And dances with the daffodils”. 3వ stanza లో 5వ line లో గూడా ఇదే భావం ఉండడాన్ని గమనించండి. Ex. “I gazed- and gazed’ ఇచ్చట కవి ఎంత సేపు అచ్చట నిలబడి తన్మయత్వం చెందినది మనకు indirect గా తెలియుచున్నది.

(5) Striking lines. Striking lines అనగా భావాన్ని కొట్టవచ్చినట్లు మనముందు పెట్టు lines అని అర్థం. మొదటి stanza లో 3, 4 lines ఈ భావాన్ని మనకు అందిస్తున్నవి. Inward eye (అనగా అంతర్గత మనో నేత్రము) మనకు ఒక mental picture ను అందించుచున్నది. ఇటువంటి mind pictures (మానసిక చిత్రములు) మనము ఒంటరిగా ఉండి చదువుచున్నపుడు ఎంతో ఆనందాన్ని ఇవ్వగలవు.

“The Daffodils” కు ఇచ్చట మనము ఒక సుదీర్ఘమైన అవగాహన ఇచ్చినాము. ఒక poem ఎలా పరిశీలనా దృష్టితో చదవాలో ఎలా రసాస్వాదాన్ని అనుభవించాలో ఇచ్చట మనకు చక్కగా బోధపడుతుంది. కాని high school level లో ఇంత విపులీకరణ అవసరం లేదు. ఒక విద్యార్థికి ఎంత అర్థం అయిందో తెలుసుకోవడానికి ఈ క్రింది ప్రశ్నలు చాలును :

(a) Poem యొక్క ప్రధాన భావము ఏమిటి?
(b) ప్రకృతిపైన, జీవితముపైన poet అభిప్రాయాలు ఎట్టివి?
(c) ఈ కొన్ని lines యొక్క భావము (annotation) ఏమిటి?
(d) Sound effects ఎలా కవి చిత్రించాడు (పదముల శబ్ద కలయిక)
(e) ఏవిధమైన figures of speech కవి ప్రయోగించినాడు?
(f) పై వానిని ఎలా వివరించాలి?
(g) మీరేమైనా ప్రత్యామ్నాయ title ను ఇవ్వగలరా? (alternative title)

Specimens (నమూనాలు)

Here are two short poems with certain questions on appreciation given below each of them and the answers worked out.
(a) She dwelt among the untrodden ways
Beside the springs of Dove;
A maid whom there were none to praise And very few to love.
A violet by a mossy stone
Half-hidden from the eye!
Fair as a star, when only one
Is shining in the sky.
She lived unknown, and few could know When Lucy ceased to be;
But she in her grave, and, oh,
The difference to me

W. Wordsworth

ప్రశ్నలు

1. Give a suitable title to the poem.
2. Name and explain the figure of speech used in the second stanza.
3. Which lines in the poem show intense feeling? What feeling has the poet expressed in these lines?
4. What do you think of the language used in the poem?

సమాధానములు

1.’The Lost Love” or “She Dwelt Among the Untrodden Ways.”
2.  The figure of speech is simile. The girl is compared to the half hidden violet and the lonely star to emphsise (a) her solitude and obscurity, and (b) her beauty of soul as well as body.
3.  The last two lines. They express the feeling of love and bereavement.
4. The most striking feature of the language is its simplicity. The poet has used simple, everyday words, mostly of one syllable; yet they produce a poem that has a magic charm.

(b) Laugh and be merry, better the world with a song.
Better the world with a blow in the teeth of a wrong.
Laugh, for the time is brief, a thread the length of a span.
Laugh and be proud to belong to the old proud pageant of man.
Laugh and be merry: remember, in olden time,
God made Heaven and Earth for joy. He look in a rhyme,
Made them, and filled them with the strong red wine of His mirth. The splendid joy of the stars; the joy of the earth.
So we must laugh and drink from the deep blue cup of the sky. Join the jubilant song of the great stars sweeping by, Laugh, and battle, and work, and drink of the wine outpoured
In the dear green earth, the sign of the joy of the Lord.
Laugh and be merry together, like brothers akin,
Guesting awhile in the rooms of a beautiful inn,
Glad till the dancing stops, and the lilt of the music ends.
Laugh till the game is played: and be you merry, my friends.

John Masefield

ప్రశ్నలు

1. What is the central idea of the poem ?
2. What is the “blow” with which the poet wants us to better the world?.
3. Quote three striking examples of metaphors used in the poem.
4. Explain: (a) “the old proud pageant of man.”
(b) “Guesting while in the rooms of a beautiful inn.”

సమాధానములు

 

1. Life is short and we must therefore laugh and be cheerful, and enjoy all the beauty and happiness that can be found on this earth.
2 It is our laughter and merriment that will serve as a blow and hit out boldly against wrong and injustice in the world.
3. (a) “Laugh, for the time is brief, a thread the length of a span.”
(b) “Made them and filled them with the strong red wine of His mirth”
(c) “Laugh till the game is played.”
4. (a) We are part of the spectacular progress of mankind which is marked with many glorious achievements..
(b) We should be happy and cheerful together during the short time we are in this beautiful world in the same way as brothers who are staying for a short while in a beautiful inn where there is dancing and music.

అభ్యాసము 163
ఈ క్రింది poems ను చదవండి. అచ్చట ఉన్న ప్రశ్నలకు సమాధానాలు రాయండి.
Read each of the following poems and answer the questions set below it
1. What is this life if, full of care,
We have no time to stand and stare?
No time to stand beneath the boughs And stare as long as sheep or cows.
No time to see, when woods we pass, Where squirrels hide their nuts in grass. No time to see, in broad daylight, Streams full of stars, like skies at night? No time to turn at Beauty’s glance,
And watch her feet, how they can dance?
No time to wait till her mouth can Enrich that smile her eyes began ?
A poor life this if, full of care,
We have no time to stand and stare.

William Henry Davies

(a) What kind of life does the poet condemn ?
(b) What are the “stars” of which the streams are full ?
(c) Name and explain the figures of speech in lines 9-10.
(d) Explain: “No time to wait till her mouth can

Enrich that smile her eyes began”.

2. My days among the Dead are past;
Around me I behold,
Wherever these casual eyes are cast, The mighty minds of old;
My never-failing friends are they,
With whom I converse day by day:
With them I take delight in weal And seek relief in woe;
And while I understand and feel How much to them I owe,
My cheeks have often been bedew’d
With tears of thoughtful gratitude.
– Robert Southey

(a) What is the central idea of the poem ?
(b) Who are the “mighty minds” ?
(c) Who are the poet’s friends and how are they never-failing?
(d) Explain: My cheeks have often been bedew’d

With tears of thoughtful gratitude.”

3. We scatter seeds with careless hand-
And dream we ne’er shall see them more:
But for a thousand years
Their fruit appears
In weeds that mar the land,
Or healthful store.
The deeds we do-the words we say
Into still air they seem to float;
We count them ever past-
But they shall last,
In the dread judgement, they
And we shall meet I
(a) What is the central idea of the poem ?
(b) Explain the imagery of the first stanza.
(c) Show how wrong we are about the consequences of our words and our deeds.
(d) Explain: “In the dread judgement, they

And we shall meet.”

4. Oh, sweet content, that turns the labourer’s sweat
To tears of joy, and shines the roughest face;
How often have I sought you high and low And found you still in some quiet place;
Here in my room, when full of happy dreams
With no life heard beyond that merry sound
Of moths that on my lighted ceiling kiss
Their shadows as they dance and dance around;
Or in a garden, on a summer’s night
When I have seen the dark and solemn air
Blink with the blind bat’s wings, and heaven’s bright face Twitch with the stars that shine in thousands there.
(a) Where does the poet seek sweet content? Where does he find it?
(b) What striking word-pictures are contained in the poem ?
(c) Name and explain the figures of speech in the last two lines.
(d) Give a suitable title to the poem.

5. Much have I travell’d in the realms of gold
And many goodly states and kingdoms seen;
Round many western islands have I been
Which bards in fealty to Apollo hold.
Oft of one wide expanse had I been told.
That deep-brow’d Homer ruled as his demesne; Yet did I never breathe its pure serene Till I heard Chapman speak out loud and boid;
Then felt I like some watcher of the skies
When a new planet swims into his ken;
Or like stout Cortez, when with eagle eyes He stared at the Pacific- and all his men Look’d at each other with a wild surmise Silent, upon a peak in Darien.
(a) What idea is expressed in the first four lines of the sonnet?
(b) Explain the significance of the phrase “deep-browed Homer”.
(c) What striking pictures are presented in the last six lines of the poem ?
(d) Quote the line which you think produces the greatest musical effect.
(e) Explain: “pure serene”; “eagle eyes”; “wild surmise”.

– John Keats

6. Strew on her roses, roses,
And never a spray of yew.!
In quiet she reposes;
Ah, would that I did too;
Her mirth the world required;
She bathed it in smiles of glee But her heart was tired, tired, And now they let her be.
Her life was turning, turning,
In mazes of heat and sound.
But for peace her soul was yearning, And now peace laps her round,
Her cabin’d, ample spirit,
It flutter’d and fail’d for breath.
To-night it doth inherit
The vasty hall of death.
(a) Does the poet show any grief at the person’s death? What exactly are his feelings on the occasion ?
(b) Quote examples of repetition from the poem.
(c) What do you gather about the life of the dead person from the poem ? (d) Explain :
(1) “Her cabin’d, simple spirit,
It flutter’d and fail’d for breath,”
(2) “To-night it doth inherit
The vasty hall of death.”

7. Books! ’tis a dull and endless strife:
Come, hear the woodland linnet,
How sweet his music ! on my life blog
There’s more of wisdom in it.
And hark! how blithe the throstle sings,
He too is no mean preacher:
Come forth into the light of things,
Let Nature be your teacher…
Enough of Science and of Art;
Come forth, and bring with you a heart
That watches and receives.

S.S.C. Examination

(a) Name and explain the figure of speech in the sixth line.
(b) What feelings does the poet seek to awaken in you by the following exclamations? “Books!””hark!”
(c) What kind of teaching does Nature give?
(d) Explain “the light of things”; “a heart that watches and receives”.

8. They tell us of an Indian tree.
Which, howsoe’er the sun and the sky May tempt its boughs to wander free And shoot and blossom wide and high Far better loves to bend its arms Downwards again to that dear earth, From which the life that fills and warms,
Its grateful being first had birth.
Tis thus, though wooed by flattering friends
And fed with fame (if fame it be).
This heart, my own dear mother, bends
With love’s true instinct back to thee.

(a) Name the figures of speech in the second and third lines.
(b) Why is the tree considered “grateful”?
(c) In what respect is the poet like the tree?
(d) Explain: “Wooed by flattering friends”; “Shoot and blossom wide and high.”

-S.S.C. Examination.

Anomalous Verbs : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

Anomalous Verbs

Introduction

The best way to learn a foreign language is to live in that country for sometime. In that case it can be learnt with more or less, as much ease as the mother-tongue; for one cannot help talking in that language to the people around for a major portion of the day. Conversation is made up of mainly ques- tions and answers. Hence it is: Interrogative, Negative and Affirmative sentences constitute the tissue of conversation.The Direct method of teaching as conceived and worked out in their Readers by Yates and Guttenberg, is based on this principle.

The chief types of sentences – Interrogative, Negaitive, Emphatic affirmative – are formed by only 24 finite verbs (or simply 24 finites) in English; hence the necessity of studying these 24 finites. While there are thousands of finites, 24 form a group by themselves and there is not a 25th of their kind, and that is the peculiarity of English. The syntax of these differs from that of the thousands of the verbs. This is, these 24 are not like the other verbs, hence they are called Anomalous finites. For one reason or other they cannot be given any one of the following names: weak, strong, regular, defective or auxiliary.

The following are the 24 finites: -am, is, was, are, were, have, has, had, do, does, did, can, could, may, might, shall, should, will, would, dare, must, need, ought, used.
These are derived from the following 12 anomalous. verbs- be, have, do, can, may, shall, will, dare, must, need, ought, used.
By this classification, it becomes surprisingly simpler to give useful syntactical information. How otherwise could the difference betwen (a) “have you”, and “do you have” (b) “need he” and “does he need” be shown clearly? This is clarified in the body of this article. The Grammar mechanism of Affirma- tive, Negative and Interrogative cannot be explained without reference to the 24 finites.

Anomalous Verbs Definition And Types with Examples In Telugu

These 24 finites occur (actually or potentially) in every sentence, but they are the despair of the student of English in earlier (and even in the later) stages. So, if the pupil in the early stages is enabled to use most of these in his conversation, he learns to speak and converse in English with others in the shortest time possible and with great ease in as much as these 24 finites not only provide the basis, but form the fabric of daily conversation. The table on page 127 shows the finites and non-finites of (a) Anomalous (b) Non-anomalous verbs, eat having been taken as a representative of the thousands of Non-anomalous verbs(i.e other verbs).

Functions of Anomalous finites

The 24 finites have mainly three functions. 1 Their first function, as structural words is to form Negative, Interrogative and Emphatic affirmative sentences. When they are used as structural words in ‘syntax’ (-sentence building) all the 24 finites are Anomalous.
They affect (1) the position of adverbs of frequency (2) help secure emphasis (a) on the negative idea in a sentence (b) on an Adjective or Adverb in a sentence.
Above all, they are needed to avoid unnecessary repetition of verbs, especially in conversation. A few of them get contracted when they are merged with (i) pronouns (ii) the introductory adverb “there” and (c) nouns.
1. (a) Th 24 finites alone can take not after them to form negative sentences.
1. Be is, am, are, was, were

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

AnomalousAnomalousOther verbs (Non-anomalous) — Thousands
Verbs (12)Finitcs (24)Finitcs (3)Non-finites (8)
1.    Be

2.    Can

3.    Do

4.    Have

5.    May

6.    Shall

7.    Will

8.    Dare

9.    Must

10.    Need

11. Ought

12.    Used

is, am, are,
was, were    5can, could    2Do, does, did    3Have, has, had,            3May, might       2

Shall, should    2

Will, would   2Dare    1

Must    1

Need    1

Ought    1

Used    1

1. Eat (1, we, you or they)

2. Eats (He, she orit)

3.  Ate (1, we, you, he, she, it or

they)

NoteSimple past tense forms
of all verbs except one, do not change
for NumbcrorPerson.

This is one of the reasons why the
English verb is easy.

Theexception isthe verb’tobe’, which
has two forms for the simple past:
Was (for Singular) and Were (for
Plural)

Was (He, she, it. orl)

Were (we, you, or they)

1. Present Participle (I am eating)

2. Past Participle (1 have eaten)

3.Perfect, Participle (I laving eaten six
plantains, 1 do not feel hungry).

4    Fused participle (1 object to Rama rat¬
ing platains).

5    Simple infinitive (I want to mi apples).

6.    Perfect infin. (You ought to have eaten
your food two hours ago).

7.    Gerund <1 am fond of eating apples).

8.    Verba! noun (The eating of fruit im¬
proves health)

 

AffirmativeNegativeMerged
He is tall.He is not tall.He isn’t tall
I do go.I do not go.I don’t go.
I will go.I will not go.I won’t go.
I shall go.I shall not go.I shalln’t go.
I can go.can not go.1 cann’t go.
She used to grumble.She used not to grumble.She usedn’t to grumble.
…………………..You need not goYou needn’t go.
H dares to goHe dare not goHe daren’t go.
She has gone.She has not gone.She hasn’t gone.
I may be going.I may not be going.I mayn’t be going

1-(b) The other verbs cannot take negative sentences:-
e.g. “I eat not apples”. – Wrong.
2-(a) finitesnegative sentencesలో వచ్చు not ఆ finites తో merge అగును. (అనగా పై 3 వ వరుసలో వలె) కలిసిపోవును.
(b) verb not merge
3 -(a) The 24 finites alone change places with the subject to form interrogative sentences:-

AffirmativeInterrogative
He is tall.Is he tall?
I do go.Do I go?
She used to grumbleUsed she to grumble?
He dares to enter the room.Dare he enter the room?

III- (b) The other verbs cannot chang places with the
subject to form interrogative sentences:
e.g.  “Eat I apples” ?- Wrong.
Note: If the main verb in a sentence is not one of the 24 tinites or does not contain one of them, the simple tense must be replaced by the corresponding compound (emphatic form of the verb containing do, does, or did, but these three are members of the 24 finites. So the procedure in I-(a) and II-(a) may therefore be adopted for transformation of sentences into Negative and Interrogative.
Emphatic

AffirmativeNeg. and Interr.
1. I eat it.I do eat it.Neg. I do not eat it Interr. – Do I eat it?.
2. He eats it.He does eat itNeg. – He does not eat it? Interr. Does he eat it?
3. I did it.I did do it.Neg. – I did not do it? Interr. – Did I do it?

Note: Do exercises 35 & 35 A
4. Adverbs of frequency (such as:- always, sometimes, often, frequently, ever, generally, rarely, usually, seldom, hardly, scarcely) are always put after the 24 finites but before all other verbs.
1. (a) I am always busy (b) He could never equal me.
2. (a) He always lies. (b) He never failed.
Note: Rule 4 is to be reversed when the A. F. is to be emphasied; as: He never could equal me.
5-(a) In the case of the 24 finites, we may emphasize the affirmative element in a sentence by using a strong stress on the finite (i.e. by means of intonation) as :- I can find time.
5-(b) But in the case of other verbs, we may emphasize the affirmative element in a sentence by using the forms do, does or did, as indicated under Emphatic Form of verbs; as :Emphatic – I do find time.
5-(c) Special emphasis is put on :-
(1) The negative idea in a sentence by placing the negative at the beginning of the sentence, the affirmative form of the verb being changed into the interrogative without the question mark at the end; as: 1. No sooner did he hear the news than he jumped for joy. 2. In no other way can I explain it.
(2) An adjective or an adverb by placing so at the beginning of the sentence followed by the said adjective or adverb, the affirmative form of the verb being changed into the interrogative without the question mark at the end; as:- (1) So fond was he of Tennis (or so much did he like (Tennis) that he used to play Tennis every day.
6. The 24 finites are also used in conversation to avoid unnecessary repetition.

(a) As a substitute verb:
1. Ought he pay fine? Yes he ought.
2. He eats more than you do.
3. You must go there. Must I?
(b) In short answers to questions (requiring Yes or No)
1. Did your brother pass the examination?
Yes, he did or No, he didn’t.
2. Can you lend me five fupees?
Yes, I can or No, I can’t.
(c) In short answers to subject questions:
1. Which of you will help me? Rama will.
2. How much of it was used? Half of it was.
3. Who discovered America? Columbus did.
(d) In question tags (which invariably contain one or other of 24 finites:
1. Rama went to Tuni, didn’t he?
2. You need not go, need you?
3. There has been heavy rain lately, hasn’t there?
4. Meet me to-morrow, will you?
5. Sita will meet me, won’t she?
(e) In declaring what is true of one person or thing is equally true of another person or thing:
1. I can go there.                                      I can go there and
2. You also can go there.                          so can you.
1. I saw the aeroplane.                              I saw the aeroplane,
2. My frien also saw the aeroplane          so did my friend.
N. B So is placed before the second part of the statement changed into the interrogative form (but without the question mark at the end).
(f) In declaring what is untrue of one person or thing is equally untrue of another person or thing:
1. I cannot go there.                                              I cannot go there nor
2. You cannot go there, either.                             (or neither) can you.
1. I didn’t see the aroplane.                                  I didn’t see the aeroplane nor (or neither)
2. My friend didn’t see the aeroplane, either.      did my friend.
Note: Nor (or either) is placed before the second part of the statement changed into the interrogative form (but with- out the question mark ? at the end).
(g) In recognising to be true what we hear :
“I saw you at the Post Office this morning,” A said to B. B replied, “Yes you did”. N.B- In the answer, yes is followed by. a pronoun and one of the 24 finites.
(h) In recognising to be untrue what we hear:
“I saw you at the Post Offic this morning” – No you didn’t. No is followed by a pronoun and an A. F.
((a) In correcting a suggestion (which is in the form of a question that is false), the A. F. is stressed onA
1. Why did you hit that child?
2. Why didn’t you come and see me yesterday?
But, I didn’t (you were misinformed). gibicos
But I did (and you were not at home).
N.B. The answer begins with but followed by a pronoun and then by a negative or affirmative A. F. according as the “why” question is a simple interrogative as in 1. or a negative interrogative as in 2.A few of the 24 A. F. are shortened with (a) Pronouns, (b) the Indroductory adverb ‘there’ and (c) Nouns; as-1: a) It’s (It is); Who’s (Who is); What’s (What is) He’s (He is) bleeding; He’s (He has) got a scar on his cheek; I’m (I am); I’d (I had) fever last night.
I’d (would) like to tell you a secret; Ill ( I will); I’ve (I have); You’are (You are); (b) There’s (There is); (c) The sun’s (sun is) about to come out soon.
Note: The acid test of one of the 24 finites being used as an Anomalous verb lies :-
(a) in its taking a not after it to form the negative (b) in changing places with the subject to form the interrogative; so it is Non-anomalous when conjugated with the auxiliary verb do to form the negative and the interrogative.
The second function of the finites is to form :-
(a) Compoound tenses: (a) continuous (b) perfect (c) emphatic affirmative with do, does and did forms)
(a) Passive voice :
The following fourteen (14) finites are used as (i) Anomalous and Non-anomalous (ii). some being used as auxiliary verbs only, while some others, as full verbs only, according to usage and meaning.
(A)-IS, AM, ARE, WERE, WAS,

1. Anamalous

(a) as auxiliary verbs to form :-
1. Continuous tenses with present participles; as :- He is reading a novel.
2. Perfect tense (archaic) with past participles of about twelve intransitive verbs to express a completed action result- ing in a change of (a) place or (b) condition or (c) both; as:
(a) They are gone to the market to buy food. He is come for the marriage. We are met (gathered or assembled)- to cele- brate the death anniversary of Potti Sreeramulu.
(b) The mighty are fallen on the bloody field. Jesus Christ is risen from the dead. How tall he is grown in a year! When the sun is set, it will be cooler. Are men descended from apes?
(c) The Chief Minister is returned sick from Delhi.
Note: The above sentences are not in the passive voice, though in each, the part of the verb be is folowed by a past participle; for the verbs are intransitive. So these verbs are in the perfect tense (archaic) and in the active voice.
3. Passive voice with past participles of transitive verbs as:- The tiger was killed.
(b) as full Verbs :-
1. Of incomplete predication:- He is brave.
2. Of complete predication with different meanings; as :- God is everywhere (exists). When will the wedding be (taken place)? You are to start now (must). I am to see him to- morrow (=it has been arranged that I shall). He has been to England three times (visited). What are you going to be when you grow up (become)?
2. NON-ANOMALOUS: to form (a) Negative Inter- rogative Why don’t you be more reasonable? (b) Imperative – Don’t be so curious.
(B) HAVE, HAS, HAD
(a) as auxiliary verb to form :-
Perfect tenses; as: (a) I have worked the whole day. (b) as full verbs meaning “possession” with different signification; as :-
1. Simple possession:- Birds have wings. I have a dislike for cigars.
2. Be the owner of material things:
(a) Has he a house of his own?
Colloq-He has got a house of his own.
(b) How much money have you?
Colloq- How much money have you got?
3. Physical and mental characteristic:
(a) Has she blue or brown eyes? Colloq-She has got blue yes.
(b) I haven’t a very good memory?
Colloq-I haven’t got very good memory.
4. Expressing relationship:- Have they any children? Colioq- How many children have they got?
5. With the meaning ‘Is (are) there’:- How many days has January? Have we any coffee in the house? Rumour has it that our school has won the foot-ball match.
6. With the meaning “if” :- Had we wings like birds, we should not need aeroplanes.

2. Non-Anomalous

(a) When did you have your shoes mended? (causative)
(b) (i) He had his leg broken. (suffering)
(b) I did not have much difficulty in
finding your house. (trouble)
(c) Did you have a (pleasant) (walk or journey); sound sleep; good time
(c) (i) How often do you have letter from your son?
(receive)
(b) Do you have a bath now? (take)
(Experi- ences)
(3) (joy) Various
(c) Does your teacher always have notes mean- for English lesson (use)
(d) At what time do you have dinner? (eat) (e) Do you have coffee or tea for you- breakfast? (drink)
(f) Will you have a cigarette ? (smoke) ings(6)

3. (a) Anomalous And (b) Non-Anomalous

(Combined) According to the nature of the activity (denoted by the verb) being 1. (a) particular occasion or (b) general. 2. (a) a necessity in the immediate future or (b)’a regular necessity starting in the past.
1. Anomalous – Have you a cold now? (particular occasion) Non-Anomalous:- Do you often have cold? (general)
2. Anomalous: Have you to attend office an hour earlier than usual this morning.
Non- Anomalous :- At what time do you have to attend office every morning?
Necessity applying to an activity in the immediate future. Necessity applying to a regular activity starting in the past.
Note: (a) With reference to the sentences: “I have to do this” and “I had to do this” (i.e. without Neg. Interr. or Em- phatic), we cannot say whether the verbs in those sentences are Anomalous or Non-anomalous.
Note:- (b) Must has only present tense, so the sense of the other tenses is expressed by the tenses of the verb have: as:-
Present
I must start at once.
I have to start at once.
I shall have to start soon.

Future
When the bell rings, I must go. Past
When the bell rang, I had to go.

(C) DO, DOES, DID
1. ANOMALOUS = as Auxiliary verbs only to form :-
(a) Neg: He did not work hard?
(b) Interr:- Does he work hard?
(c) Emphatic affirm:- He did not say much, but what he did say was important.
2. NON-ANOMALOUS:
(with the meaning “perform”) as – he did not do the whole work.
Note: In this case the verbs do, does, did are themselves conjugated in the Neg. & Interr. with the auxiliary do.
(D) USED (to) (Full verb)
Used, pronounced (“you;st”) derived from an obsolete verb and used only in the simple past (for expressing only things of the past time), is followed by to and an infinitive.
1. Anomalous; as :-
(a) He used n’t to smoke a cigar before marriage (habit)
(b) Used he to visit you regularly last year? (repeated action).
(c) The Hindu Kings used to be crowned in Delhi (custom). (iv) Life is not so cheap as it used to be ( state existing in the past). (v) It used to be thought (i.e. people thought) that the sun turned round the earth (motion). (vi) There used to be cinema in this street (there was).
2. Non-Anomalous in:-
(a) Colloquial style; as :-
(Did he use to visit you regularly last year?)
(b) Tag-questions; as :-
He used to smoke before marriage, didn’t he?
(or use (d) n’t he?)
(c) Responses; as :-
A:- Rama used to live in Hyderaba.
B: Oh, did he ? (or, Oh, used he ?)
N.B: In the following used (pronounced: you : st) is a past participle meaning “accustomed to” or familiar “with” as:- (i) Soldiers are used to danger. (ii) I am not used to (hard labour) carrying logs of wood. (iii) You will soon get used to our ways.
Note: There is altogether another verb use (=make use of) whose past tense is used (pronounced Yu: zd).
This is a regular verb; as :-
What kind of wood did he use for windows? (E) DARE (Full verb)
1. ANOMALOUS AND NON-ANOMALOUS
With the same meaning “have the courage or impudence enough to do something”;
Anomalous
1. Neg. He dare not jump across the stream.
Non-anomalous
1. Neg. He does not dare to
jump across the stream.

Anomalous Verbs

2. Interr-Dare he jump across the stream?
3. Conditional sentence  do not know if he dares jump across the stream.
Note Dare is used only in the simple present with a bare infinitive without s in the 3rd Pers. Singular Present tense.
2. Interr.- Does he dare to Jump across the stream?
3. Semi Neg.- He hardly dares to speak in my presence.
4. Indirect question – I wonder how he dared to insult me.
5. Affirmative-He dares to insult me.
Note Here dare is used as a
regular verb with a to infinitive ands in the 3rd Person in Singular Present tense.
2. NON-ANOMALOUS: Regular verb (meaning challenge or face); as :-
He dares Rama to jump across the stream (challenge). He dared many dangers (faced).
(F) NEED (Full verb)

1. ANOMALOUS (with the meaning “to be under the necessity to do something”).
It is used only in the Simple present with a bare infinitive without ‘s’ in 3rd person Singular in:-
(i) Neg: He need not go so early.
(ii) Semi Neg:- The teacher need hardly tell the back- ward pupils that they must work hard.
(iii) Interr:- Need he go so early?
(iv) Indirect question:- Ido not understand why he need go so early.

2. NON-ANOMALOUS Regular verb with the mean- ing “require” as :-
Does he need warm clothing?
Note: In the case of the above 14 verbs, when they are used as, Non-anomalous, they follow the rules governing other verbs for forming Negative and Interrogative.
3. The third function is (a) to serve as Model verbs (i.c. to form) certain moods for which English has no inflected verb (forms) (b) to express such concepts as are not covered by the moods in English.

The above function is served by the following 10 verbs which are always anomalous :
G-Can, could; may, might; must, ought; shall, should; will, would; (auxiliary verbs) These are originally verbs with full meanings. But when these senses have been entirely lost they are said to be used as Auxiliary verbs).
(a) Model verbs; as:-
1. Optative mood: May you live long! (wish)
2. Potential mood:- I can answer the question (ability) 3. (Fast dying) Subjunctive mood:
a) We eat that we may live (purpose).
b) If he should discover it, we are ruined (condition).
c) Would that I had died for thee (unfulfilled wish)
d) I would not do it, if I were you.
e) He may catch the train, if he hurries (doubt).
(b)ai) You must (ought to) do it (compulsion; necessity; obligation).
b) Who may this person be? (uncertainty).
c) It may rain to-morrow (possibility or contingency).
d) May I use your dictionary ? (permission).
e) You might post this letter for me (request).
f) The thieves hid behind the bush (for fear) that the police might not see them (fear).

USED (to): DARE, NEED (Auxiliary verbs,
The three A.F’s Used (to), Dare and Need have been already treated as full verbs [Vide II function (D) (E) (F)] These A.F’s are also used as Auxiliary verbs, when they accompany- ing a non-finite verb-form enlarge the main verbal meaning (expressed by the non-finite) vide: Webster’s International Dictionary as:
1. He used to smoke cigars before his marriage.
He used to (auxiliary) express that smoking (main verb) is a past habit.
2. He dare not jump across the stream.
He dare (auxiliary) expresses that there is no courage for him to jump (main verb).
3. You need not start now.
Here need (auxiliary) expresses that there is no present necessity
of starting (main verb).
From the foregoing, it is clear that :-
a) 24 A.F’s are (i) Auxiliary and
b) 10 A.F’s (lil Function G)
are only
c) The remaining 14 A.F.’s
Anomalous.
(a) Auxiliary
(b) Anomalous Auxiliary andFull verbs.
Anomalous ana gill Non-anomalous

Correct the following

1. Loved he not?
2. He this book saw not.
3. He reads not his book with care.
4. He did not brought the books.
5. Intend you to go?
6. I not like that man.
7. What said you?
8. Be not late for school.
9. Which boy did speak?
10. Go not out in the rain.
11. Why wentest thou to his house?
12. Why sit you not down.
13. Which way went the man?
14. My son obeys me not.
15. Went he to school?
16. I have no any money.
17. Why you come?
18. To whom you will give this book?
19. Why you have come?
20. Why you were here?
21. Came he?

Ans:- 1. Didn’t he love? 4. He did not bring the books. 5. Do you intend to go? 8. Don’t be late for school. 9. Which boy spoke? 11. Why didst thou go to his house? 13. Which way did the man go? 14. My son does not obey me. 16. I have no money. 21. Did he come? or Was he come?

Participles or Verbal Adjectives

Participles ar 355:- 1. Present participle 2. Past participle 3. Perfect participle. ఇవి క్రియలవలన ఏర్పడును.
(a) Present Participle:- a Simple present tense o చివర ing చేర్చుటచేత నేర్పడును. ఉదా : 80, going
(b) Past Participle:- a ox, Simple present tense రూపములకు చివర (i)en, n చేర్చుటచేతను ఏర్పడును; ఉదా :- beat, beaten, show, shown; (ii) ed, d,t walk, walked; love, loved; burn, burnt verb యొక్క Conjugation లోని మూడవ రూపము (అనగా ఆఖరు వరుసలోని రూపము) Past participle.
(c) Perfect Participle:- 5 having so past participle రూపములు చేర్చుటనే ఏర్పడును. ఉదా :- having walked, having loved, having burnt.
Ten Forms of Different Participles Transitive Verbs
Active voice
Passive voice
Present: Eating
Being eaten
Past:-
Eaten
Perfect: Having eaten
Having been eaten
Intransitive Verbs
Present Fading The flowers in the vase are fading. Past – faded: The flowers have not entirely faded. perfect- Having faded: The flowers having faded, had to be thrown out.
N.B. 1. A good knowledge of the participles as well as their use in 1. Construction 2. Synthesis and 3. Transformation of sentences goes a long way in acquiring command over the language.

The participle construction is a brief and convenient way of joining a subsidiary statement to the principal one. Present Participle
This is one of the eight non-finites, formed by adding “ing” to the simple present tense form; so we cannot make sentencs with this alone.
The following are some of its most important uses:
1. As part of a verb to form the continuous tenses; I am eating; I was eating; I shall be eating; etc.
2. As epithets :- There are books in running brooks.
3. As a predicate-adjective:-
He came running along the street.
N.B. The following examples are worth noticing :- 1. There is no one living in the street. 2. They wait about doing nothing. 3. He felt his strength improving. 4. He spent an hour visiting all the stalls in the Exhibition. 5. If one’s life is spent trying to stop nuclear tests, it is the noblest. 6. He is busy preparing for the examination. 7. While going to the bazar, he had an accident.
4. In compound participle phrases:-
5. A good-looking fellow. 2. A well-fitting cap.
Note:- Running brooks running are run అను క్రియనుండి ఏర్పడి adjective వలె brook అను noun ను quality చేయుచున్నది. ఇట్లు verb వలెను. adjective వలెను కూడ వ్యవహరించుట డి దీనిని Verbal Adjective అందురు.
Since running partakes of the nature of both a verb and an adjective it is called a participle.
5. Participles, adjectives ao adjectives
a) Adverbs చేత modify చేయబడును. ఉదా:-
The girl was found in an almost dying stage.
b) Degrees of Comparison ను తీసికొనుము. ఉదా :- He spoke in a more pleasing way.

6. Some participles are used as Prepositions.
There are many rumours concering, (or regarding) the murder; Respecting your plan, I shall write to you.. During the summer vacation, my father wishes to celebrate my sister’s marriage.
7. Some participles are used as actual nouns: as >> buildings; surroundings; savings; cuttings; belongings’ etc.
Present Participle
Active voice
a) Qualifying the subject:-
1. I was walking on the road. I saw a snake.
ఇందు మొదటి వాక్యము Subsidiary of statement (అప్రధాన విషయము), రెండవది Primary statement (ప్రధానవిషయము). ఇచట subsidary statement ను Participle phrase లోనికి మార్చి, పై రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి, Simple sentence గా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును. Walking on the road, I saw a snake.
Walking – Present participle qualifying the pronoun. 1. (Or) Walking on the road, participle phrase qualifying. ‘I walking on the road, saw a snake’ అనుట తప్పు. ఏలన pronoun (1) subject ou participle phrase subject 50% ముందు రావలెను.
5 noun subject as a participle phrase subject ముందు గాని తరువాత గాని రావచ్చును. ఉదా : walking on the road, Rama saw a snake.Or Rama walking on the road, saw a snake.
Note : 1. పై వాక్యములోని రెండు పనులలో ఒకటి ప్రారంభమై జరుగుచుండగా రెండవది సంభవించును.
Note: 2. Simple Walking on the road, I saw a snake. Complex – While I was walking on the road, I saw a
Compound – I was walking on the road and I happened to see a snake then.
2. Taking up his gun, he rushed at the tiger. పై వాక్యములోని రెండు పనులు ఇంచుమించు ఒకే సమయమందు (అనగా ఒక పని వెనువెంటనే రెండవది) ప్రారంభమగును.
e.g. (1) The sum rising has made the sky bright.
The day dawning, we all woke up. (Participle in an absolute phrase).
3. Not seeing the mother bear, the hunter went upto its den to catch hold of one of its cubs.
పై వాక్యములోని రెండు పనులు ఒకే సమయమునందు ప్రారంభమై, ఒకటి జరుగుచున్నంత కాలము రెండవది జరుగును.
4. Next morning filling up their stock with provisions the travellers rode off through the forest.
పై వాక్యములోని రెండు పనులలో ఒకటి జరిగిన వెంటనే రెండవది జరుగును. అనగా రెండు పనులకు మధ్య అవధి (interval) తక్కువ.
5. (a) He is feverish. He has applied for leave. 33 వాక్యము (subsidiary statement) లోని verb చే సూచించబడు స్థితి (state) వలన రెండవ వాక్యములోని పని జరుగుట సంభవించును.
2 do Jivo 503, Simple, Complex, Compound sentences గా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
S-Being feverish, he has applied for leave. Cx-He has applied for leave, as he is feverish
Cd-He is feverish, so he has applied for leave. (b) 1. The weather was fine. 2. I went out for a walk. S-The weather being fine, I went out for a walk. Ax – As the weather was fine, I went out for a walk. Cd-The weather was fine and I therefore went out for a
(c) He had a sword in hand. He rushed at the enemy. S-S Sword being in hand, he rushed at the enemy
Or Sword in hand, he rushed at the enemy (Here the parti- ciple is understood).

6. (1) He opened the box. (2) Upon that he saw a snake
మొదటి వాక్యములోని పని జరిగిన మీదట దాని ఫలితముగా అంతట రెండవ ‘వాక్యములో” పని జరుగును.
Simple – Opening the box, he found a snake in it.
Cx- When he opened the box, he found a snake in it. Cd-He opened the box and thereupon he found a snake
7. Turn to the right. You will find a temple. S-Turning to the right, you will find a temple. Cx-If you turn to the right, you will find a temple. Cd. Turn to the right and you will find a temple. e. g……God willing, we shall meet again (=If God wills…) 8. You must confess your fault. Otherwise you will be fined.
S-Not confessing your fault, you will be fined.
Cx-If you do not confess your fault, you will be fined (or) Unless you confess your fault, you will be fined.
Cd-You must confess your fault, or you will be fined. 9. The wrestler, possessed greater strength than his opponent. The former was defeated.
S. Possessing greater strength the wrestler was defeated. Or
In spite of the wrestlr possessing greater strength than his opponent he was defeated.
Cx-Though the wrestler possessed greater strength than his opponent; he was defeated.
10. When the present participle is left without a proper subject of reference, the participle is called an impersonal absolute as:
(1) Considering hisabilities, he should have been selected (=If one considers his abilities). (2) Roughly speaking; there are a thousand applications for two posts.
3. Supposing this to be true, you are certainly guilty.
b) Qualifying the object:
1) I saw a boy. 2) He was sitting near the well.
S-I saw a boy sitting near the well.
Cx. I saw a boy who was sitting near the well. Cd-A boy was sitting near the wel and I happened to see
him then.
Our Headmaster starts today to attend the District Head- master’s conference opening tomorrow at Kakinada.
c) Qualifying the complement
The bearer of this note is a candidate appearing for the Matric in April next.
Present Participle
Passive Voice
a) Qualifying the subject:

1. He was disgusted with his step-mother’s treatment. 2. He left the house.
ఇచ్చట Passive Voiceలో నున్న subsidiary statement లోని క్రియను passive present participleలోనికి మార్చి, పై రెండు వాక్యము లను కలిపి Simple sentence గా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
.Being disgusted with his step-mother’s treatment, he left thehouse.
Being disgusted passive present participle qualifying the pronoun.
Note: Being disgusted అను మాటను లోపింపజేసి వాక్యము నిట్లు కూడ వ్రాయవచ్చును.

Disgusted with his step-mother’s treatment he left the house.
e.g. Provided you agree to the condition, there will be no difficiculty = That you agree to the condition, being provided, there will be no difficulty.
b) Qualifying the object:
1. The people saw the traitor’s corpse.
2. It was dragged along the streets.
S-The people saw the traitor’s cropse being dragged along the streets.
Or
The people saw the traitor’s corpse dragged along the streets (omitting being).
Cx-The people saw the traitor’s corpse, while it was being dragged along the streets.
Perfect Participle
Active Voice
a) Qualifying the subject;
He made a mistake..
He apologised.
-ఈ రెండు పనులలో (ఒకటి తప్పు చేయుట) పూర్తి అయిన పిమ్మట రెండవ పని క్షమింపగోరులు) జరుగును. అందుచే మొదటి పూర్తి అయిన పనిని తెలియజేయు వాక్యమును Perfect Participle లోనికి మార్చి ఆ రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి Simple sentenceగా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
Having made a mistake, he apologised.
Having made-Perfect Participle qualifying the subject,
e.g: Having eaten six plantains, I suffered from stom- achache last night.
b) Used in an absolute phrase:
The commander had fled. So the army was defeated.
The commander having fled the army was defeated.

Note: Perfect participle చేయుపనిని చేయునని గ్రహింపనగును.
c) He has narrowly failed. He wishes to sit for the October examination.
Past Perfect tense
Having failed narrowly he wishes to appear for the October examination.
e.g. Having learnt that there is a vacancy for a typist, I apply for
Note: Perfect participle 6 Present Perfect
tense చేయు పనిని చేయును.
Perfect Participle
Passive Voice
He was insulted by his master. So he resigned.
Passive voice లో నున్న మొదట జరిగిన పనిని తెలియజేయు వాక్యమును Passive Perfect Participle లోనికి మార్చిపై రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి Simple sentenceగా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
Having been insulted by his master, he resigned.
The Commander had The Commander having been been killed. So the army fled. killed, the. army fled.

Note : ఒక పని పూర్తి అయిన పిమ్మట దాని ఫలితముగా కొంత ఆవధితో మరియొక పనీ సంభవించు సందర్భములోనే Perfect participleను
వాడవలెను.
Note: Sometimes the perfect participle is understood: as: 1. Given the three sides of a triangle, construct it = The three sides of a triangle (having been) given, (you) construct it. 2. All things (having been) considered, you were found to be in the right.
Past Participle A
The past participle is one of the eight non-finites (the third form in the conjugation) and so we cannot make a sentence with this alone.
The following are some of the important uses:
1. It forms part of a verb to form the perfect tenses as: I have eaten. I had eaten.
2. As epithet:
1. A ruined tower. 2. A burnt child dreads the fire.

Note : Ruined అనునది ruin అను verb నుండి ఏర్పడి పనిని తెలియజేయును. tower అను nounను adjective వలె qualify చేయు చున్నది. కాబట్టి దానిని past participle అందురు.
3. As a predicative adjective – He looks tired.
4. Compound Participle Phrase:
1. Well-behaved boy. 2. Ready-made goods.
5. To form the passive voice:
A tiger was killed by me.
6. As a noun: Let bygones be bygones.
7. To express the idea of getting a thing done by others: I cannot do it; so I shall have (or get) it done by my brother.

Note: Done – Obj. compl. of have (or get).
B . I saw a box. It was covered with a cloth.
Subsidiary statement eos ‘It was covered with a cloth’ passive voice లో నున్నది. దీనిని passive voice లో నుండు Adjective clause లోనికి మార్చి ఆ రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి complex sentence గా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.
Complex: I saw a box which was covered with a cloth.
complex sentenceలో నున్న Rel. pron. (which) ను దాని తరువాతనున్న be యొక్క రూపము (was)ను కూడ లోపింపజేసి ఆ Adjective clause ను phrase లోనికి మార్చి ఆ వాక్యములను simple sentenceగా ఇట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.

Simple: I saw a box covered with a cloth.
Note: covered; Past part. qualifying the noun box. e.g: 1. The basket is filled with flowers. 2. It is on the table.
Complex: The basket which is filled with flowers, is on the
Sim: The basket filled with flowers is on the table. Note: filled – Past Participle qualifying the noun basket. Note: Transitive ver a past participle మాత్రమే ఈ construction సాధ్యమగును.
1. With the enemy’s guns resounding, and his own friends opposed to him, Lenin had to agree to a compromise. 2. Bruised and bleeding, Gandhi was taken to his friend’s house in Durban.
1. This had been done.
2. We all left the place.
Note: Done absolute this.
D This (having been) done, we all left the place (=When this had been done, we……….) Past part. qualifying the Nominative
Gerunds or Verbal Nouns

(1) ‘Reading novels is pleasant’ e అనునది Verb వలె novels అను కర్మను కలిగియుండుటయే గాక, noun వలె is అను క్రియకు కర్తగా నున్నది. కాబట్టి reading అనునది verb వలెను. noun వలెను కూడ వ్యవహరించుటచే అది యొక verb-noun; దీనినే Gerund అందురు.
Gerund present participle 38 a simple present రూపమునకు చేర్చుటచే ఏర్పడును.
(2) Transitive verb 35 Gerunds Active voice! సంబంధించినవి రెండు Passive voice కి సంబంధించినవి రెండు మెత్తము నాలుగు రూపములు గలవు..
verbయొక్క Gerund కు రెండే రూపములు,
Present: Fading. Perfect – Having faded.

(3) ఇప్పుడు Participle రూపములును. Gerund రూపములును, ఒక్కగానే కనిపించుచున్నవి. కాని Participle, Gerund ఒకటి కావు. Participle adjective పనిచేయగా Gerund noun పనిని చేయును.

(4) Gerund ఒక విధమైన Nounకాబట్టి ఆది Noun వలనే ఒక verbకు (c) complement m (d) 25
(a) subject (b) object preposition కు object గాను ఉండవచ్చును. ఉదా ::
a) Subject to a verb: Reading is pleasant.
b) Object to a verb: I like reading;
c) Complement to a verb: The best kind of occupation is reading.
d) Object to a prepostion: He is fond of reading.

(5) Gerund, transitive verb od 50 verbకూడ కాబట్టి Tranisitive verbవలనే objectను govern చేయును. ఉదా I am fond of reading novels.

(6) Gerund verb sa adverbs 33 modify 3.
ఉదా :
a) He is noted for speaking clearly.
b) He is in the habit of taking exercise daily.
Note: oder main verbos subject, Gerund
యొక్క subject ఒకటే అయి ఉండవలెను. ఉదా :
We increase trade by learning languages.
Wrong – Trade increases by learning languages.
ఏలన learning కి subject గా trade ఉండ వీలు లేదు.
Correct: Trade increases by our learning languages.sg మారునపుడు Gerund (learning)కి వెనుక దానికి చెందు subject యొక్క possessive case రూపము (our) వాడవలెను.
Note: If the main verb is passive the subject of the Gerund may be implied; as:

1. Trade is increased by learning languages. 2. Iron is found by digging in the earth.
A Gerund should not be used for infinitive and vice versa, where idiom has established certain conventions.
A writer ignorant of that idiom is often betrayed by his failure to observe the conventions.
Some nouns, adjectives and verbs are idiomatically fol- lowed by the infinitve and some by the gerund, a few of which are set out in the table see page 153.

The sentence; “Your mother is opposed to your going abroad.” Implies: your mother is not opposed to you person- ally, but she is opposed to the action of going abroad.
Going: Gerund, object of the prepostion, to and qualified by the possessive adjective your.
On the above analogy we have, “I am opposed to Rama’s going abroad.” This sentence is grammatically correct but reads awkward if not absurd. The use of the noun Rama in the possessive case, (Rama’s) offends against euphony, elegance and genius of the language. This is confirmed firstly by the pronoun this having no possessive form at all; as:
“There is little hope of this happening today”. Secondly, this usage has long been adopted by good writers:
“Upon Prometheus telling his father, the wish of his friend, Valentine, he at once determined to send his son to Milan”- Lamb..
Lastly this provides an idiomatic and elegant mode of expression: “I am opposed to Rama going abroad”.

But here the noun Rama defines construction. The par- ticiple going and the noun Rama are fused into a whole; hence going is called a fused participle.
Note: The possessive form must be avoided in the case of nouns (in fused participle construction) and usage has changed since the days of Fowler.
Note: A running stream means a stream that runs (here running is a participle qualifying the noun stream).
Whereas ‘drinking water’ does not mean ‘water’ that drinks but ‘water fit for dinking (here evidently drinking is not a participle but a gerund used as an adjective qualifying the noun water as: Riding horse (=Horse used for riding, walking stick (=stick used in walking); Writing table (=table used for writing); Dining hall (=hall used for dining), Reading room (-room used for reading.)

To Distinguish Gerunds from Participles
Participles
1. A running stream
2. A dancing bear
3. A walking dictionary
Gerunds
A running track A dancing lesson
A dancing hall
A walking stick

1. Transformation of sentences with the help of the Gerund: A-Complex: When we opened the box, we found a snake in it, Simle On opening the box, we found a snake in it. Cd-1 opened the box and found a snake in it.
B-Complex: I do not doubt that you are able to do it. Simple -I do not doubt your being able to do it.
Cd-You can do it and I don’t doubt it.
C-Complex: The boy was punished, because he did not sit for the examination. Cd-The boy had not sat for the examina- tion, so he was punished.
D-Complex: Does anybody object, if I smoke?
Simple Does anybody object to my smoking?
E-Complex: Since I joined the army I have not seen him. Simple: Since joining the army I have not seen him. Cd-I joined the army, but I have not seen him since.
2. Complex Since he joined the army, I have not seen him. Simple: Since his joining the army, I have not seen him. Cd-He joined the army, but I have not seen him since. Ex. 35 B.
ఈ క్రింది వానిలో participles ను Gerunds ను కనుగొనుము.

1. Here is a sleeping cat.
2. I am tired of doing this work.
3. Sleeping is necessary to life.
4. Sleeping is more difficult than writing.
5. In running the race he fell.
6. I saw a boy throwing a stone.
7. Riding is a healthy exercise.
8. He earns his living by writing books.
9. Writing books is his employment.
10. His employment is writing books.
11. We found him writing a book.
12. I saw a big writing table.
13. A rolling stone gathers no moss.
14. A barking dog never bites.
15. A drowning man catches at a straw.
16. A kid standing on the roof of a house saw a wolf passing by.

Verbal Nouns
Gerund నకు వెనుక The యును తరువాత of ను ఉండిన దానిని ప్రత్యేకముగా Verbal Noun అందురు. The reading of novels is pleasant. Formation of verbs
Verbs are formed from:
i) Nouns: Grass, graze; Food, feed; Fool, befool; Slave, enslave; Haste, hasten; Cross, crucify.
ii) Adjectives: Soft, soften; Glad, gladden; Just, justify.

Ex. 35 C
Form Verbs from:
Blood, gulf, hard, friend, dark, length, courage, bath, glass, fruit, broad, wide, loss. Convention Regarding Use of Gerund and Infinitive After Certain Words
Sl. No. Followed by Preposition & Gerund
1. Habit of rising early.
2. Duty of checking the work.
3. Idea of waiting till to-morrow.
4. Objections to white-washing
5. Resistance to being driven out.
6. With the view of building a house.
1. (Un) equal to facing danger.
2. Be used to carrying logs of wood.
3. Weary of walking.
4. Skilful in doing.
5. Sick of waiting.
1. Confess to having stolen.
2. Object to paying his share.
3. Succeed in solving the problem.
4. Looks forward to meeting his son.
5. Aim at passing the examination.
6. Perists in doing a thing.
NOUNS
Followed by Infinitive
1. Refusal to help me.
2. Reluctance to use force.
3. Tendency to tease subordinates.
4. Determination to learn English.
5. Hesitation to buy shares.
6. Inspiration to immortalise daffodils.
ADJECTIVES
1. (Un) able to face danger.
2. (In) sufficient to put down the rebellion. 3. (In) adequate to support a family.
4. (In) competent to manage the office. 5. Delightful to wander in the moonlight. VERBS
1. Does not profess to be a scholar.
2. Refusal to pay the fine.
3. Threatens to punish.
4. Avails to soften him..
5. Pledges [1. to engage] one’s word or one’s honour to do a thing. [=2. to bind oneself to do a thing]. [=to bind one by (or as if by) a pledge to do a thing e.g. He pledged the signatory powers to meet the common danger]. 6. (Be) pledged [-to cause one to make (or sign) a pledge: e.g. The officers are pledged to join the clerical staff in the strikel.

Tenses Introduction : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

Tenses Introduction

210. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చదవండి:
1. I write this letter to please you.
2. I wrote the letter in his very presence.
3. I shall write another letter tomorrow.
మొదటి వాక్యములోని Verb “write” –  present time. (cht)
రెండవ వాక్యములోని  Verb “wrote” – past time,
మూడవ వాక్యములోని  Verb “shall write” – future time.

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

211. ఈ విధముగా Verb తన యొక్క present, past tense మరియు future tense లను తెలియజేస్తుంది. 211. వర్తమానకాలమును అనగా ఇప్పటి కాలమును తెలియజేయు Verb ను Present Tense లో ఉన్నది అంటాము.
I write.                        I love.

భూతకాలమును అనగా గడచిపోయిన కాలమును తెలియజేయు Verb ను Past Tense లో ఉన్నది. అని అంటాము.
I wrote.                        I loved.

భవిష్యత్ కాలములోని రాబోవు పరిస్థితిని తెలుపు Verb ను అది Future Tense లో నున్నది అని
అంటాము.
I shall write.                  I shall love.

212. ఈ విధముగా మూడు ప్రధానమైన Tenses (కాలమానములు) ఉన్నవి. అవి : భూత, భవిష్యత్, Sgar renew. m The Present, the Past, the Future.
గమనిక (Note) : కొన్ని సార్లు సందర్భమును బట్టి past tense వర్తమానకాలం అర్థాన్ని (sense of present tense) Present tense, future tense 55.
I wish I knew the answer. (= I’m sorry I don’t know the answer).
(Past tense – Present time)
Let’s wait till he comes, (Present tense- future tense)

Tenses Introduction Definition And Types With Examples In Telugu

213. ఈ క్రింద “love” అను పదమునకు సంభవించే ముఖ్యమైన Tenses చూపబడినవి :

PRESENT TENSE
Singular NumberPlural Number
1st PersonI loveWe love
2nd personYou loveYou love
3rd PersonHe lovesThey love
PAST TENSE
Singular NumberPlural Number
1st PersonI lovedWe loved
2nd PersonYou lovedYou loved
3rd PersonHe lovedThey loved
FUTURE TENSE
Singular NumberPlural Number
1st PersonI shall/will love.We shall/will love
2nd PersonYou will loveYou will love
3rd PersonHe will loveThey will love

 

214. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చదవండి.
1. I love.                                                  (Simple Present)
2. I am loving.                                         (Present Continuous)
3. I have loved.                                        (Present Perfect)
4. I have been loving.                              (Present Perfect Continuous)
ఈ పై వాక్యములలో Verbs (క్రియలు) అన్నీ కూడా present tense (వర్తమాన కాలములో నున్నవి. మొదటి వాక్యములోని Verb యొక్క action మామూలు ధోరణిలో సామాన్యముగా చెప్పబడినది. ఆ పని పూర్తి అయ్యిందా లేక అసంపూర్తిగా మిగిలి పొయ్యిందా అనే విషయం జోలికి పోలేదు.
రెండవ వాక్యములో, action ఇంకా నడుస్తూనే ఉంది. కాని ఆగిపోలేదు. పూర్తికాలేదు అని అర్ధం. మూడవ వాక్యములో action మాట్లాడు సమయానికి సంపూర్ణముగా అంకితం అయ్యింది అని చెప్పబడినది.
నాలుగవ వాక్యములో action ఇంకా పూర్తిగా నడుస్తూ ఉంది. పూర్తి కాలేదు అనే అర్ధం వస్తుంది. దీనిని present perfect continuous tense అని అంటాము. ఇచ్చట action సమగ్రంగా సడుస్తూంది అనే భావానికి బలం వస్తుంది. ఈ విధముగా tense ఎప్పుడు action సంభవించింది అనే విషయమే కాకుండా, ఆ పని ఏ విధంగా జరుగుతుంది అనే అర్థాన్ని కూడా యిస్తుంది.

215. Present Tense verb కు నాలుగు రూపములు ఉన్నట్లుగా Past Tense కు కూడా నాలుగు రూపాలు (భాగములు) ఈ క్రింద చూపబడిన విధముగా ఉన్నవి :
1. I loved.                                                (Simple Past)
2. I was loving.                                        (Past Continuous)
3. I had loved.                                          (Past Perfect)
4. I had been loving.                                (Past Perfect Continuous)
అదే విధముగా Future Tense కు కూడా నాలుగు భాగములు ఉన్నవి :
1. Ishall/will love.                                        (Simple Future)
2. I shall/will be loving                                (Future Continuous)
3. I shall / will have loved.                          (Future Perfect)
4. I shall have been loving.                        (Future Perfect Continuous)
ఈ విధముగా Verb లోని భాగమైన Tense అనునది time, action యొక్క పరిస్థితిని (ఎంత వరకు పూర్తి అయ్యింది అనే భావము) సూచించునని తెలుస్తుంది.

216. Verb ఎప్పుడు కూడా, Subject (కర్త) యొక్క number (singular, plural) ను మరియు subject యొక్క person (నేను, నీవు, అతడు) అను భావములను అనుసరించి యుండును.

Simple Present TensePresent Continuous Tense
I speakI am speaking
You speakYou are speaking
He speaksHe is speaking
We speakWe are speaking
They speakThey are speaking
Present Perfect TensePresent Perfect Continuous Tense
I have spokenI have been speaking
You have spokenYou have been speaking
He has spokenHe has been speaking
We have spokenWe have been speaking
They have spokenThey have been speaking
Simple Past TensePast Perfect Tense
I spokeI had spoken
You spokeYou had spoken
He spokeHe had spoken
We spokeWe had spoken
They spokeThey had spoken
Past Continuous TensePast Perfect Continuous Tense
I was speakingI had been speaking
You were speakingYou had been speaking
He was speakingHe had been speaking
We were speakingWe had been speaking
They were speakingThey had been speaking
Simple Future TenseFuture Perfect Tense
I shall/will speakI shall/will be speaking
You will speakYou will be speaking
He will speakHe will be speaking
We shall/will speakWe shall/will be speaking
They will speakThey will be speaking
Future Continuous TenseFuture Perfect Continuous Tense
I shall/will have spokenI shall/will have been speaking
You will have spokenYou will have been speaking
He will have spokenHe will have been speaking
We shall/will have spokenThey will have spoken
He shall/will have been speakingThey will have been speaking

 

అభ్యాసము 45
(a) ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన వాక్యములలోని Verbs ను గుర్తించి దాని Moods, Tenses ను తెలుపుము.
1. The river flows under the bridge.
2. I shall answer the letter to-night.
3. I knew he was there, for I had seen him come.
4. It has been raining all night.
5. I hear he has passed all right.
6. I had finished when he came.
7. He takes but little pride in his work.
8. I have been living here for months.
9. Be good, sweet maid.
10. By this time to-morrow I shall have reached my home.
11. It is time we left.
12. He told me that he had finished the work.
13. God forgive you !
14. He is waiting for you in the compound.
15. Piper, pipe that song again.
16. I am hoping to gel a holiday soon.
17. Perhaps it were better to obey him.
18. Do noble deeds, not dream them all the day.
19. I shall have plenty of time tomorrow.
20. Though this be madness, yet there is method in it.
21. The king had never before led his troops in battle.
22. If he was guilty, his punishment was too light.
23. We have heard a strange story.
24. The travellers, all of whom had seen the chameleon, could not agree about its colour.
25. Beware lest something worse should happen, to you.
26. The farmer is cutting the corn which hasripened.
27. I wish my brother were here.
28. She would rather we stayed till tomorrow.

అధ్యాయము 25

The Uses Of The Present And Past Tenses Present Tenses

Simple Present Tense
217. Simple Present ను ఈ విధంగా ఉపయోగిస్తారు :-
(1) ఒక అలవాటును (habit) చిత్రీకరించుటకు :
He drinks tea every morning.
I get up everyday at five o’clock.
My watch keeps good time.

(2) ఒక సత్యాన్ని తెలియజేయుటకు
The sun rises in the east.
Honey is sweet.
Fortune favours the brave.

(3) Here, there అను పదములతో ప్రారంభింపబడి, ఏమి జరుగుచున్నది అనే భావాన్ని తెలియజేయుటకు
Here comes the bus!
There she goes!
(4) ప్రత్యక్ష కథలో Simple Past Verb కు అనుబంధముగా –
Sohrab now rushes forward and deals a heavy blow to Rustam.
Immediately the Sultan hurries to his capital.

(5) ఒక ఖచ్చితమైన programme కు లేక ఒక fixed timetable కు భాగంగా నున్న భవిష్యత్ సంఘటనను తెలియచేయుటకు
The next flight is at 7.00 tomorrow morning.
The match starts at 9 o’clock.
The train leaves at 5.20.
When does the coffee house reopen?
వాడుక భాషలొ ఈ భావాలు బాగా కనిపిస్తాయి.

218. Simple Present Tense verb ను వేరే విధములుగా వాడే విధానములను గూడా ఇచ్చట పరిశీలించండి:
(1) కొటేషన్లు చూపడానికి ఉపయోగిస్తారు.
Keats says, ‘A thing of beauty is a joy for ever’.
(2) ఒక condition ను గాని, ఒక time ని గాని తెలియజేయు clauses లో Simple Future Tense కు బదులుగా దీనిని వాడతారు.
I shall wait till you finish your lunch.
If it rains we shall get wet.
(3) Sports ను cover చేసే broadcasting commentaries లో ఒక దాని తరువాత ఇంకొకటిగా సంభవించు సంఘటనలను వివరించుటకు. Present Continuous బదులు, Simple Present ను వాడతారు. ఇచ్చట కాలవ్యవధిపై గాక, ఒక దాని తరువాత ఇంకొకటిగా సంభవించే పరిణామాలపై గ్రామరు భావము కేంద్రీకరింపబడుతుంది.
(4) Present Continuous Tense కు బదులుగా కూడా Simple Present ను వాడతారు.

Present Continuous Tense

219. Present Continuous ఈ విధంగా వాడతారు:
(1) మాట్లాడే సమయంలో జరుగుతున్న సంఘటనను గురించి చెప్పడానికి
She is singing (now).
The boys are playing hockey.
(2) మాట్లాడే సమయంలోని తాత్కాలిక సంఘటనను వివరించడానికి. అది ఆ సమయంలో సంభసించక పోయినను ఈ rule వర్తిస్తుంది.
I am reading ‘David Copperfield’ (but I am not reading at this moment).
(3) ఇంకొంచెం సేపటిలో ప్రారంభింపబోవు programme ను వివరించడానికి:
I am going to the cinema tonight.
My uncle is arriving tomorrow.

220. కొన్నిసార్లు Present Continuous verb ని always, continually, constantly అను పదములతో కలిపి వాడతాము.
My dog is very silly; he is always running out into the road.

221. ఈ క్రింది verb పదములను సాధారణ పరిస్థితులలో continuous form లో వాడము.
(1) Verbs of perception, e.g., see, hear, smell, notice, recognize,
(2) Verbs of appearing, e.g., appear, look, seem.
(3) Verbs of emotion, e.g., want, wish, desire, feel, like, love, hate, hope, refuse, prefer.
(4) Verbs of thinking, e.g., think, suppose, believe, agree, consider, trust, remember, forget, know.. understand, imagine, mean, mind.
(5) have (= possess), own, possess, belong to, contain, consist of, be (except when used in the passive).
e.g.

WrongRight
These grapes are tasting sour.These grapes taste sour.
I am thinking you are wrong.I think you are wrong.
She is seeming sad.She seems sad.
He is having a cellular phone.He has a cellular phone.

“కాని పైన ఉదహరించిన క్రియా పదములను, చిన్న చిన్న మార్పులకు గాను continuous tense form లో వాడవచ్చును.
She is tasting the soup to see if it needs more salt,
(taste = test the flavour of)
I am thinking of going to Malaysia,
(think of = consider the idea of)
They are having lunch, (have= eat)

Present Perfect Tense

222. Present Perfect ని ఇలా వాడెదము :
(1) ఇప్పుడే పూర్తికాబడిన గతంలోని కార్యక్రమమును తెలియజేయుటకు.
He has just gone out.
It has just struck ten.
(2) కాలనిర్ణయం చూపించకుండా గతంలో జరిగిపోయిన సంఘటనలను తెలియజేయుటకు.
Have you read ‘Gulliver’s Travels”?
I have never known him to be angry.
Mr. Hari has been to Japan.
(3) గతించిన కాలములో సంభవించి, వాని ప్రభావము యిప్పటికీ మనం అనుభవించుచున్నపుడు:- Gopi has eaten all the biscuits (i.e., there aren’t any left for you).
I have cut my finger (and it is bleeding now).
I have finished my work (= now I am free)..
(4) గతంలో సంభవించిన సంఘటన యిప్పటికీ continue అవుచున్నపుడు : (since మరియు for – phrases *)
I have known him for a long time.
He has been ill since last week.
We have lived here for ten years.
We haven’t seen Padma for several months.

223. ప్రశ్నలు వేయునపుడు never, ever అను పదములతోను మరియు negative అర్ధం వచ్చు సందర్భములలోను ఇంకను ప్రశ్నలు వేయునపుడు so far, till now, yet అను పదములతోను, already, today, this week, this month అను యితర పదములతోను కలిపి Present Perfect ను వాడవచ్చును. గమనిక (Note): Present Perfect ను past tense లోనున్న adverbs తో కలిపి వాడరాదు.
‘He has gone to Kolkata yesterday’. Wrong
Say ‘He went to Kolkata yesterday’..

Present Perfect Continuous Tense

224. గతించిన కాలములో ప్రారంభింపబడి, ప్రస్తుతం గూడా Continue అవుచున్న కార్యానికి Present
Perfect Continuous tense ను వాడతాము.
He has been sleeping for five hours (and is still sleeping). They have been building the bridge for several months.
They have been playing since four o’clock.

225. ఇప్పటికిప్పుడే పూర్తిగావించ బడిన action కు గూడా Present Perfect Continuous tense ను వాడతాము. ఇచ్చట ఇంకొక సంబంధిత కార్యక్రమాన్ని వివరించడానికి ఈ tense ఉపయోగపడుతుంది. Why are your clothes so wet ?’ ‘1 have been watering the garden’.

Past Tenses

Simple Past Tense

226. గతించిన కాలములో ప్రారంభింపబడి ఆ గతించిన కాలములో పూర్తిగావింపబడిన action కు Simple Past tense ను వాడతాము. ఈ సందర్భములో adverb ను గాని adverb phrases ను గాని
వాడతాము.
The steamer sailed yesterday.
I received his letter a week ago.
She left school last year.

227. కొన్ని సందర్భములలో ఈ Simple Past tense ను adverb of time లేకుండా గూడా వాడతాము. కాని అక్కడ ఉన్న సందర్భాన్నిబట్టి కాలము యొక్క గుర్తింపు అచ్చట రావాలి.
I learnt Hindi in Nagpur.
I didn’t sleep well (i.e., last night).
Babar defeated Rana Sanga at Kanwaha.

228. గతించిన కాలములోని మన పాత అలవాట్లను చెప్పుకోవడానికి కూడా ఈ Simple Past tense ను ప్రయోగిస్తాము. అటువంటప్పుడు, సందర్భమును బట్టి సమయము నిఘూడంగా అర్ధమగును. He studied many hours everyday.
She always carried an umbrella. Past Continuous Tense

229. గతించిన కాలములోనే ప్రారంభింపబడి అలానే ఆ గతించిన కాలములోనే నడుస్తూ ఉన్న action కు Past Continuous tense ను వాడతాము. ఇచ్చట ఎంతకాలం అలా continue అయ్యింది అనే విషయం పేర్కొనవలసిన పని లేదు.
We were listening to the radio all evening.
It was getting darker.
The light went out while I was reading.
When I saw him, he was playing chess.
పైన పేర్కొనబడిన నిర్వచనములో, ఒక సుదీర్ఘ కాలగమనంలో కొనసాగిన ఒక action మధ్యలో ఒక కొత్త action వచ్చినపుడు Past Continuous tense ను మరియు simple past ను వాడడం జరిగింది. ఈ విధంగా మధ్యలో చూపబడిన action కు simple past ను వాడినాము.

230. ఈ tense ను always, continually, etc. అను పదములతో కలిపి దీర్ఘకాలపు అలవాట్లను గురించి చెప్పడానికి కూడా వాడెదము.
He was always grumbling.

Past Perfect Tense
231. గతించిన కాలములో ప్రారంభింపబడి అదే కాలములో పూర్తికాబడిన action కు Past Perfect Tense ను వాడతాము.
I met him in New Delhi in 1996. I had seen him last five years before.

232. గతించిన కాలములో రెండు సంఘటనలు జరిగి ఉంటే, ఏది ముందుది ఏది వెనకది అని ముందు గ్రహించాలి. ఈ పరిస్థితిలో మనకు Past Perfect Tense అందుబాటులోకి వస్తుంది. మొదటి సంఘటనకు Past Perfect Tense ను వాడతాము.
When I reached the station the train had started (so | couldn’t get into the train).
I had done my exercise when Hari came to see me.
I had written the letter before he arrived.

Past Perfect Continuous Tense233. గతించిన కాలములోనే ప్రారంభింపబడి మరియు ఆ గతించిన కాలములోనే కొంత కాలం వరకు అడ్డులేకుండా ముందుకు సాగిపోవుచున్న action ను వివరించడానికి Past Perfect Continuous
Tense ను వాడతాము.
At that time he had been writing a novel for two months.
When Mr. Mukerji came to the school in 1995, Mr. Anand had already been teaching there for five years.

|అభ్యాసము 46
క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన ఖాళీలలో తగిన verb form ను పూరింపుము.

1. The earth________ round the sun. (move, moves, moved)
2.My friends________ the Prime Minister yesterday, (see, have seen, saw)
3. I__ him only one letter up to now. (sent, have sent, send)
4. She__worried about something. (looks, looking, is looking)
5. It started to rain while we____________ tennis. (are playing, were playing, had played)
6. He______________ fast when the accident happened. (is driving, was driving, drove)
7. He______________asleep while ho was driving. (falls, fell, has fallen)
8. I’m sure I him_____ at the party last night. (saw, have seen, had seen).
9. He__________ a mill in this town. (have, has, is having)
10. He___________ here for the last five years. (worked, is working, has been working).
11. He thanked me lor what I ______(have done, had done, have been doing).
12.I_____________a strange noise. (hear, am hearing, have been hearing)
13.I_____________him for a long time. (know, have known, am knowing)
14.I_____________English for five years. (study, am studying, have been studying)
15.Don’t disturb me. I_________ my homework. (do, did, am doing)
16.Abdul_____________ to be a doctor. (wants, wanting, is wanting)
17. The soup____good. (taste, tastes, is tasting).
18.He _____TV most evenings. (watches, is watch, is watching)
19.He______________out five minutes ago. (has gone, had gone, went)
20. When he lived in Hyderabad, he to the cinema once a week. (goes, went, was going)
21. The baby ______all morning. (cries, has been crying)
22.I______Rahim at the zoo. (saw, have seen, had seen)
23.I_______Kumar this week. (haven’t seen, did’t see, am not seeing)
24. This paper______ twice weekly. (is appearing, appearing, appears)
25. Ashok fell off the ladder when he______ the roof. (is mending, was mending, mended)

అభ్యాసము 47
క్రింద brackets లో ఇవ్వబడిన వాటిలో సరియైన పదమును ఎంచుకొనుము.
1. The Headmaster. to speak to you. (wants, is wanting, was wanting)
2. I a new bicycle last week. (bought, have bought, had bought)
3. Here are your shoes; I them. (just clean, just cleaned, have just cleaned)
4. It since early morning. (rained, is raining, has been raining)
5.I___ a lot of work ioday. (did, have done, had done)
6. I____________something burning. (smell, am smelling, have been smelling)
7. Look! The sun over the hills. (rises, is rise, is rising)
8. She__unconscious since four o’clock. (is, was, has been)
9. He used to visit us every week, but he now. (rarely comes, is rarely coming, has rarely come)
10. We for his call since 4.20. (are waiting, have been waiting, were waiting)
11. Everyday last week my aunt a plate, (breaks, broke, was breaking)
12. I know all about that film because I it twice. (saw, have seen, had seen)
13. Our guests: they are sitting in the garden, (arrived, have arrived, had arrived)
14. I him since we met a year ago. (didn’t see, haven’t seen, hadn’t seen)
15. We__our breakfest half an hour ago. (finished, have finished, had finished)
16.She jumped off the bus while it_ (moved, had moved, was moving)
17. When we went to the cinema, the film (already started, had already started, would already start)
18. for half an hour when it suddenly started to rain. (have walked, have been walking, had been walking)
19. Did you think you me somewhere before? (have seen, had seen, were seeing)
20. The town its appearance completely since 1980. (is changing, changed, has changed)
21. Sheila her case, look. (packed, has packed, had packed)
22. When I was in Sri Lanka, I Negombo, Beruwela and Nilaveli. (visited, was visited, have visited)
23.I meant to repair the radio, but __time to do it today. (am not having, haven’t had, hadn’t)
24. When I my dinner I went to bed. (had, have had, had had)
25.Mento  abolish wars up to now, but maybe they will find a way in the future, (never managed, have never managed, will have never managed)

అధ్యాయము 26

The Future

234. భవిష్యత్తు Tense ను గురించి మాట్లాడడానికి English లో చాలా పద్ధతులు ఉన్నవి. Simple Future Tense : “going to” అనే జంట పదములను వాడుట ద్వారా మరియు Simple Present ను Simple Future గా మార్పిడి చేసి వాడుట అను ఈ మూడు పద్ధతులు అవి.
Simple Future Tense

235. మన ఆధీనములోనికి రానట్టి పరిణామాల గురించి మాట్లాడేటప్పుడు Simple Future Tense ను వాడతాము. ఈ సందర్భములో ఇచ్చట భావమును fact గా గమనించదగును.
I shall be twenty next Saturday.
It will be Diwali in a week.
We will know our exam results in May.

236. మనం ఏదైతే ఆలోచిస్తామో, ఏదైతే భవిష్యత్తులో సంభవిస్తుందని ఊహించుతామో అట్టి దానిని గురించి మాట్లాడునపుడు Simple Future Tense అనగా దానికి తగిన క్రియా పదము (verb) ను ఉపయోగిస్తాము.
I think Pakistan will win the match.
I’m sure Helen will get a first class.
As in the above sentences, we often use this tense with / think, and I’m sure. We also say I expect .! believe, Probably. etc.

237. మాట్లాడేటప్పుడు ఏ పని చేస్తామో, ఏ పని జరుగుతుందో ఆ విషయమును తెలియజేయడానికి ఈ tense ను ఉపయోగిస్తాము.
It is raining. I will take an umbrella.
“Mr. Sinha is very busy at the moment.” – “All right. I’ll wait

Going to
238. మనం ఒక పని చెయ్యాలని నిశ్చయించుకొన్నప్పుడు, ఆ పని యొక్క ప్రారంభదశలో “going to” అనే జంట పదాలను ఉపయోగించి వానికి verb యొక్క ధాతు రూపాన్ని జత చేస్తాము. ధాతువు word అనగా root word అనుకోవచ్చును. Be యొక్క భావాన్ని ధాతువుగా తీసుకొనవచ్చును.
“Have you decided what to do?” “Yes. I am going to resign the job” “Why do you want to sell your motorbike?” – “I’m going to buy a car.”
ఇచ్చట ఈ విషయం గుర్తుంచుకోవాలి. మన ఆలోచనలో నున్న భావాన్ని కార్యరూపంలో పెట్టడానికి అన్ని ప్రయత్నాలూ చేసిన దశలో “going to” ను వాడతాము. (I’m going to buy) అప్పటికప్పుడే తీసుకొన్న నిర్ణయానికి మాత్రం Simple Future Tense వాడాలి.

239. మున్ముందు జరగబోయే విషయాన్ని, ఏదైతే నిశ్చయంగా జరుగుతుందని అనుకుంటామో వాటిని గురించి మనం మాట్లాడే సమయంలో కూడా “going to” అనే జంట పదాలను వాడతాము. అదే సమయంలో (అదే present tense time లో) ఆ సంభవించే పరిణామంపై కొంత నమ్మకం గూడా ఉండాలి.
It is going to rain; look at those clouds.
The boat is full of water, It is going to sink.
She is going to have a baby.

240. క్షణంలో ప్రారంభం కానున్న action ను కూడా “going to ” అను జంట పదాలు express చేస్తవి.
Let’s get into the train. It’s going to leave.
Look! The cracker is going to explode. Be about to

241. క్షణంలో ప్రారంభంకానున్న future action గురించి Be about to + (base form of verb) BAUTUR  చెబుతుంది.
Let’s get into the train. It’s about to leave.
Don’t go out now. We are about to have lunch.

Simple Present Tense
242. Official programmes, timetables 30g Simple Present Tense ను వాడతారు.
The college opens on 23rd June.
The film starts at 6.30 and finishes at 9.00.
When does the next train leave for Chennai?

243. If, unless, when, while, as (=while) before, after, until, by the time and as soon as అను పదములతో ప్రారంభించబడిన clauses ను భవిష్యత్తుభావము కావలసినపుడు, Simple Future Tense అవి Future Tense కొరకు ఉద్దేశింపబడినను Simple Future Tense లో రాయబడవు.
I won’t go out if it rains. (not: will rain)
Can I have some milk before I go to bed?
Let’s wait till he finishes his work.
Please ring me up as soon as he comes.

Present Continuous Tense
244. భవిష్యత్తులో మనము ప్రారంభింపబోవు కార్యాన్ని గురించి మనము ప్రస్తుతం మాట్లాడునపుడు గూడా Present Continuous Tense ను వాడతాము.
I am going to Shimla tomorrow.
We are eating out tonight.
Mr. Abdul Rehman is arriving this evening.
నీ వ్యక్తిగత arrangements ను దృష్టిలో పెట్టుకొని Present Continuous Tense verb ను వాడవలసిందిగా ఇచ్చట చెప్పడమైనది.

Future Continuous Tense
245. భవిష్యత్తులో ఒక నిర్దిష్టమైన సమయంలో ప్రారంభింపబడి కొంతకాలం కొనసాగే కార్యక్రమాలకు మనము Future Continuous Tense ను వాడతాము.
I suppose it will be raining when we start.
This time tomorrow I will be sitting on the beach in Singapore.
“Can I see you at 5 o’clock?” “Please don’t come then. I will be watching the tennis match on TV.”

26. భవిష్యత్తులో ప్రారంభింపబోవు కార్యక్రమాలకు గూడా general గా ఈ tense ను వాడతాము.
I will be staying here till Sunday.
He will be meeting us next week.
The postman will be coming soon.

Be To
247. Be to+base form of verbe, og official plans 5, arrangements కు వాడతాము.
Be to is used in a formal style, often in News reports.
Be is usually left out in headlines, e.g. “Prime Minister to visit America”.
వార్తలలోని headlines లో వాడినపుడు ‘be’ ని వదిలివేయటం జరుగుతుంది.

Future Perfect Tense
248. భవిష్యత్తులో ఒక నిర్దిష్ట కాలానికి పూర్తి కాబడే actions కు Future Perfect Tense ను వాడతారు.
I shall have written my exercise by then.
He will have left before you go to see him.
By the end of this month I will have worked here for five years.

Future Perfect Continuous Tense
249. భవిష్యత్తులో Continue అవుతూ ఒక నిర్దిష్ట కాలానికి పూర్తికాబడే actions కు Future Perfect Continuous tense ను వాడతారు. కాని ఈ పద్ధతి ఇప్పుడు అంతగా వాడుకలో లేదు.
By next March we shall have been living here for four years.
I’ll have been teaching for twenty years next July.

అభ్యాసము 48
సరియైన ఒకే ఒక verb తో గాని, లేక బాగా సరిపడే రెండు verbs తో గాని ఈ క్రింది ఖాళీలను పూరించండి.
1. The plane_____at 3.30. (arrives, will arrive)
2. I will phone you when he______back. (comes, will come)
3. When I get home, my dog._________________at the gate waiting for me. (sits, will be sitting)
4. The Joshis this evening.___(visit, am visiting)
5. Look at those black clouds. It (will rain, is going to rain)
6.The train ____before we reach the station. (arrives, will have arrived)
7. Perhaps we______ Mahabaleshwar next month. (visit, will visit)
8. Unless we____now we can’t be on time. (start, will start)
9.I___________into town later on. Do you want a lift? (drive, will be driving)
10. The next term____________on 16th November. (begins, is beginning)
11. Oh dear! I_____(will sneeze, am going to sneeze)
12. By 2005, computers____many of the jobs that people do today. (will be taking over, will have taken over)
13. I’m sure she_____the exam. (passes, will pass)
14. I_____________home next Sunday. (go, am going)
15. I_________you one of these days, I expect. (see, will be seeing)
16. Help! I__________fall. (will fall, am going to fall)
17. She has bought some cloth; she herself a blouse. (will make, is going to make)
18. I your house this afternoon. It is on my way home from work. (will be passing, am passing)
19. Hurry up! The programme (will start, is about to start)
20. This book is not long. I it by lunch time, (will be reading, will have read)

అధ్యాయము 27

The Verb: Person And Number

250. Personal Pronouns, Verb  Persons. First, Second మరియు Third person. అందువలన ఈ క్రింది విధముగా వాక్యాలను రాసెదము :
1. I speak.
2. You speak. (Old English: Thou speakest.)
3. He speaks.

మొదటి వాక్యములో Subject, First Person లో ఉన్నది. కావున Verb కూడా First Person లో ఉన్నది.
రెండవ వాక్యములో, Subject, Second Person లో ఉన్నది. కావున Verb కూడా Second Person లో నున్నది.
మూడవ వాక్యములో Subject, Third Person అనగా (He, she, they etc.) లో ఉన్నది. కావున Verb కూడా Third Person లో ఉన్నది.
Verb కు Subject కు ఎప్పుడూ ఒకే person formation ఉంటుంది.

251 . Noun, Pronoun కు లాగానే, Verb కు కూడా Singular, Plural (ఏకవచన, బహువచన రూపాలు) ఉంటవి. ఏకవచనములో S వస్తుంది. బహువచనములో రాదు.
1. He speaks.
2. They speak.
ఇచ్చట మొదటి వాక్యములో Subject లోని ఏకవచన బహువచన రూపాలు ఎలా ఉంటవో చూపబడినది. మొదటి వాక్యములో Subject (కర్త) ఏక వచనములో ఉన్నది. కావున verb కూడా ఏకవచనములో ఉన్నది. రెండవ వాక్యములో Subject (కర్త) బహువచన రూపములో నున్నది. కావున verb కూడా బహువచనములో నున్నది.
దీని వలన మనకు Subject మరియు verb పదములు రెండున్నూ ఒకే number కలిగి ఉంటవి అని
అర్ధం అవుతుంది. అనగా verb పదము, number మరియు person విషయములలో Subject తో ఏకీభవించి ఉంటుంది.

252. First Person Second Person, Third Person విషయాలలో కూడా, subject (కర్త) కు verb కు అనుబంధం ఉంటుంది. కావున ఈ క్రింది రూల్సును (నిబంధనలు) గ్రామరు మనకు ప్రతిపాదించింది. Verb పదము, subject తో number విషయంలోను మరియు person విషయములోనూ ఏకరూపం కలిగి యుండవలయును.
(a) Subject singular number 8 first person wood, verb sa singular number మరియు first person అయి ఉండాలి.
I am here.
I was there.
I have a bat.
I play cricket.
(b) Subject 3singular number 8 third person wood, verb sa singular number మరియు third person అయి ఉండాలి.
He is here.
He was there.
He has a bat.
He plays cricket.
(c) Subject పదము plural number మరియు third person అయి ఉంటే, verb పదము కూడా plural number మరియు third person అయి ఉండాలి.
They are here.
They were there.
They have bats.
They play cricket.

గమనిక (Note) :  Modern English లో Verb పదములకు Number (ఏకవచన, బహువచన రూపములు) మరియు Person భేదములు (నీవు, నేను, అతడు మొ.) inflection కు సంబంధించి అంతరించినవి. These are called inflections in English. Third person singular లో ఈ మార్పు రాలేదు.
Inflection అనగా word రూపములో మార్పు రావడం.
I speak.
We speak.
You speak. You speak. (You is both singular and plural in current English.)
He speaks. They speak. (Third person singular లోని verb లో మార్పు వచ్చినది గమనించండి.)
The only exception is the verb to be. We say-
I am.
You are.
He is ..
We are.
You are.
They are.
Subject and verb agreement (సవివరణ) Book ll chapter 17 లో కలదు.

అధ్యాయము 28
THE INFINITIVE
253. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చదవండి :
I want to go.
They tried to find fault with us. “to go” మరియు “to find” అను జంట పదములను “infinitives” అని అంటారు. Infinitive verb నకు పునాది రాయి వంటిది. చాలాసార్లు దీని వెనువెంటనే “to” అను పదము ఉంటుంది.

254 ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చదవండి:
1. To err is human,
2. Birds love to sing.
3. To respect our parents is our duty.
4. He refused to obey the orders. MIHTO SU
5. Many men desire to make money quickly.
మొదటి వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “To err” అను పదము subject (కర్త) గా act చేయుచున్నది. మరియు అది “is” అను verb ను తన object (కర్మ) గా తీసుకొనుచున్నది.
రెండవ వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “to sing” అను పదము “love” అను verb పదమునకు object గా నున్నది.
మూడవ వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “to respect” verb అయిన “is” కు subject గా నున్నది. కాని ఒకో సందర్భములో అది verb లాగా ఒక object ను తీసుకుంటుంది కూడా.
నాలుగవ వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “to obey” noun మాదిరిగా “Refused” అను verb కు object గా పనిచేయుచున్నది.
ఐదవ వాక్యములో Infinitive అయిన “to make” అను పదము, noun లాగానే, verb అయిన “desire” అను పదమునకు object గా నుండి adverb చేత అజమాయిషీ చెయ్యబడుతుంది.
Infinitive ని verb లక్షణాలున్న noun గా చెప్పవచ్చును. Verb పదము transitive గా ఉండి తనకొక object ను తీసుకొనును, infinitive పదమునకు verb noun లక్షణాలు వచ్చును.

255 “To” అను పదాన్ని Infinitive లో బహుళంగా వాడతాము. కాని అది Infinitive లో మరీ అంత ప్రాముఖ్యమైనట్టిది గాదు. ఈ విధంగా, bid, let, make, ‘need, *dare, see, hear అను పదముల
తరువాత “10” ను వాడము.
Bid him go there.
I bade him go.
Let him sit here.
I will not let you go.
Make him stand.
I made him run.
but phot utilith 38 (abbr)
We need not go to-day.
You need not do it.
You dare not do it.
I saw him do it.
I heard him cry.
Except when they are conjugated with do.

256. Will, would, shall, should, may, might, can, could, must án éré infinitive ను “to” లేకుండా వ్రాయుదుము.
I will pay the bill.
You should work harder.
He can speak live languages.
You must come to the office at nine tomorrow.

Had better, had rather, would rather, sooner than, rather than  infinitive లో “to” ఉండదు.
You had better ask permission.
I had rather play than work.
I would rather die than suffer so.

Use Of The Infinitive

257. Infinitive ను దానికి తోడుగా ఏ పదమైనా ఉన్నా లేకపోయినా, Noun లాగా ఈ క్రింద చూపిన
పద్ధతులలో వాడెదరు.
(1) Verb & Subject m
To find fault is easy.
To err is human.
To reign is worth ambition.
(2) Transitive Verb & Object m
I do not mean to read.
He likes to play cards.
(3) Verbs Complement
Her greatest pleasure is to sing.
His custom is to ride daily.
(4) Preposition & Object m
He had no choice but (= except) to obey.
The speaker is about to begin.
(5) Objective గా నుండి Preposition గా నుండుట :
I saw him go.
Infinitive ను పై విధములగా Noun గా వాడినపుడు, దానిని Simple Infinitive అంటారు.

 

258. Infinitive ని ఈ క్రింది విధంగా కూడా వాడతాము.
(1) ఒక purpose ను (నిర్దిష్ట విధానము) తెలియజేయు సందర్భములో Verb ను qualify చేయుటకు (వివరించుటకు)
He called to see my brother (- for the purpose of seeing my brother).
We eat to live. (Purpose)
I come to bury Caesar. (Purpose)
He wept to see the desolation caused by the flood. (Cause) (2) Adjective ను (విశేషణమును) qualify చేయుటకు:
Figs are good to eat.
This medicine is pleasant to take.
The boys are anxious to learn.
He is too ill to do any work.
(3) నామవాచకమును (Noun ను) qualify చేయుటకు:
This is not the time to play. You will have cause to repent. He is a man to be admired.
Here is a house to let.
This house is to let.
(4) ఒక వాక్యమును వివరించుటకు:
To tell the truth, I quite forgot my promise.
He was petrified, so to speak.
Infinitive ను పై విధముగా వాడినపుడు దానిని Gerundial లేక Qualifying Infinitive అని అంటారు. మొదటి 1,2 వాక్యములలో Gerundial Infinitive తాను adverb గా పనిచేయుచున్నది. మూడవ వాక్యములో అది Adjective పనిని చేయుచున్నది. నాలుగవ వాక్యములో అది తన స్వభావాన్ని పూర్తిగా చూపుతుంది.

259. Infinitive, active voice ‘m passive voice moto. Active voice m నున్నపుడు అది పూర్తిగా present tense గా గాని, present perfect గా గాని ఉంటుంది. మరియు కేవలం అచ్చట జరిగిన పనిని మాత్రం చెబుతూంది. లేక continue అయ్యే action ను గురించిగూడా చెబుతుంది. ACTIVE
Present:
Perfect :
Present Continuous:
Perfect Continuous:
to love.
to have loved.
to be loving.
to have been loving.
Infinitive passive గా నున్నపుడు present మరియు perfect forms లో మాత్రమే ఉంటుంది.
Present:
Perfect:
to be loved.
PASSIVE
to have been loved.

అభ్యాసము 49
ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన వాక్యములలో Infinitive ఎలా వాడబడిందో తెలుపుము.

1. There was nothing for it to fight.
2. Let us pray.
3. The mango is fit to eat.
4. I heard her sing.
5. I have come to see you.
6. The order to advance was given.
7. Men must work and women must weep.
8. I am sorry to hear this.
9. He is slow to forgive.
10. A man severe he was and stern to view.
11. And fools who came to scoff remained to pray.
12. Thus to relieve the wretched was his pride.
13. Full many a flower is born to blush unseen.
14. Music hath charms to soothe the savage beast.
15. Never seek to tell thy love.
16. To retreat was difficult; to advance was impossible.
17. Everybody wishes to enjoy life.
18. My desire is to see you again.
19. There was not a moment to be lost.
20. The counsel rose to address the court.
21. My right there is none to dispute.
22. The ability to laugh is peculiar to mankind.
23. He has the power to concentrate his thoughts.
24. He was quick to see the point.
25. I am not afraid to speak the truth.
26. Better dwell in the midst of alarms Than reign in this horrible place.
27. Can you hope to count the stars?
28. To toil is the lot of mankind.
29. It is delightful to hear the sound of the sea.
30. It is a penal offence to bribe a public servant

అభ్యాసము 50
Infinitive ను ఉపయోగించి క్రింద ఇచ్చిన జంట వాక్యములను కలుపుము.
[Example. – Napoleon was one of the greatest of generals. He is universally acknowledged so. Napoleon is universally acknowledged to have been one of the greatest of generals. Note – I will be noticed that we have turned one of the sentences into a phrase containing an infinitive.]
1. He did not have even a rupee with him. He could not buy a loaf of bread.
2. Every cricket team has a captain. He directs the other players.
3. You must part with your purse. On this condition only you can save your life.
4. He went to Amritsar. He wanted to visit the Golden Temple.
5. The robber took out a knife. He intended to frighten the old man.
6. I speak the truth. I am not afraid of it.
7. The insolvent’s property was sold by the official Assignee. The insolvent’s creditors had to be paid.
8. He wants to earn his livelihood. He works hard for that reason.
9. The strikers held a meeting. They wished to discuss the terms of the employers.
10. He has five children. He must provide for them.
11. The old man has now little energy left. He cannot take his morning constitutional exercises.
12. The Rajah allowed no cows to be slaughtered in his territory. It was his custom.
13. He formed a resolution. It was to the effect that he would not speculate any more.
14. Everyone should do his duty. India expects this of every man.
15. She visits the poor. She is anxious to relieve them of their sufferings.
16. He collects old stamps even at great expense. This is his hobby.
17. He must apologise for his misconduct, it is the only way to escape punishment.
18. I have no aptitude for business. I must speak it out frankly.
19. He was desirous of impressing his host. So he was on his best behaviour in his presence.
20. That young man has squandered away all his patrimony. He must have been very foolish.
21. He has risen to eminence from poverty and obscurity. It is highly creditable.

అధ్యాయము 29
260. ఈ వాక్యాన్ని చదవండి:
Hearing the noise, the boy woke up.
Hearing అనే పదము నామవాచకము అయిన boy అను పదమును వివరిస్తుంది (qualifying). ఎటువంటి బాలుడు? వినుచున్న బాలుడు అని అర్ధం చేసుకోవాలి. ఇది adjective చేసే పని. ఈ hearing అనే పదము Verb అయిన hear అనే పదము నుండి పుట్టినది. తదుపరి తన object ను (కర్మపదము) అజమాయిషీ చేస్తుంది (governs). కావున ఇచ్చట hearing అనే పదము Verb మరియు adjective లక్షణములు కలిగియున్నది. దీనిని Participle అంటాము. ఇచ్చట దీనిని Verbal Adjective అని కూడా
అంటాము.
Def. (నిర్వచనం) : – Participle అనే పదము Verb లో భాగముగా నుండి Verb మరియు adjective ల పనిని చేస్తుంది. లేక Participle కొంత వరకు Verb మరియు adjectiveఅయి ఉన్నది అని కూడా చెప్పవచ్చును.
గమనిక (Note): ‘Hearing the noise’ అనే పదజాలము participle చేత పరిచయము చేయబడి (introduced) participle phrase అని పిలవబడుచున్నది. కాని పై వాక్యములో అది Adjective Phrase. 261. Participle కు సంబంధించిన ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములను చూడండి :
1. We met a girl carrying a basket of flowers.
2. Loudly knocking at the gate, he demanded admission.
3.The child, thinking all was safe, attempted to cross the road.
4.He rushed into the field, and foremost fighting fell.

పై examples అన్నీ కూడా Present Participles. ఇవి అన్నీ కూడా – ing తో అంతమగుచున్నవి. ఇవి నడచుచున్న action ను గురించియు, సంపూర్ణముగాచేయని action ను గురించియు వివరించును. ఈ మూలక పదమైన verb, transitive అయి ఉంటే, మొదటి వాక్యములో లాగా అది ఒక object ను (కర్మ పదమును) తీసుకుంటుంది. రెండవ వాక్యములో Participle ను adverb విశ్లేషిస్తుంది (అనగా వివరిస్తుంది). Loudly అనునది adverb కదా.

262. Present Participle కు అనుబంధంగా, Past Participle కూడా ఉన్నది. Past Participle పూర్తి అయిన action ను గురించి గాని ఒక పరిస్థితిని గురించిన వివరణను గాని తెలియజేస్తుంది.
ఉదాహరణలు :-
Blinded by a dust storm, they fell into disorder.
Deceived by his friends, he lost all hope.
Time misspent is time lost.
Driven by hunger, he stole a piece of bread.
We saw a few trees laden with fruit.
Participle సాధారణంగా – ed, d, t, – en, – ౧ లతో end అవుతుంది.
ఈ Present Participle మరియు Past Participle కాక మనకు Perfect Participle అనే ఇంకొకటి కూడా ఉన్నది. ఇది గతించిన కాలములో సంపూర్ణముగా పూర్తి కాబడిన action ను (చర్య) ను గురించి చెబుతూంది.

263. ఈ క్రింది ఉదాహరణలలో Participle ను simple qualifying (వివరించు) adjectives గా noun కు ముందు భాగంలో వాడడం జరిగింది. ఈ విధముగా వాడిన సందర్భములో దానిని Participle Adjectives అని అంటాము.
A rolling stone gathers no moss.
We had a drink of the sparkling water.
His tattered coat needs mending. The creaking door awakened the dog. A lying witness ought to be punished. He played a losing game.A burnt child dreads the fire.
His finished manners produced a very favourable impression. He wears a worried look.
Education is the most pressing need of our country.
He was reputed to be the most leamed man of his time.
ఉన్నవి. Most అనునది comparitive degree క్రిందికి వస్తుంది కదా!
A cho bé e Gamevog) dagab Lacr
examples & Participle degrees ol comparison (adjectives & Sг88)

264. Adjective 35 past participle
Passive voice
ఇస్తుంది మరియు Present Participle పదము Active voice భావాన్ని ఇస్తుంది.
a spent swimmer a swimmer who is tired out;
(stoff) beca
a burnt child = a child who is burnt;
botini)
Good
a painted doll = a doll which is painted;
a rolling stone = a stone which rolls.

265. ఇంతవరకు చదివిన Participle భావాలను ఈ క్రింద సంక్షిప్తంగా ఇవ్వడం జరిగింది :
(1) Participle 38 verbal Adjective.
(2) అది Verb మాదిరిగా noun లేక pronoun ను govern చేయును. ఈ విధంగా :-
Hearing the noise, the boy woke up.
[The noun noise is governed by the participle Hearing]. (3) Verb మాదిరిగా adverb చేత అది modify చేయబడును. Loudly knocking at the gate, he demanded admission. [Here the participle knocking is modified by the adverb Loudly.]
(4) Adjective మాదిరిగా noun లేక pronoun ను వర్ణించును. ఈ విధంగా :- Having rested, the men continued their journey.
(5) Adjective మాదిరిగా అది comparative degree కలిగి ఉండును. చూడండి: Education is the most pressing need of our time.
[Here the participle pressing is compared by prefixing most.]

266. Participle vs 225 artev :-
Active
Present: loving
Perfect: having loved
USE OF THE
Passive
Present: being loved. Perfect: having been loved. Past: loved.

267. Continuous Tenses (Active Voice) e tenses o ‘be’ verb కూడిన Present Participle నుండి ఏర్పడును.
I am loving.
I was loving.
I shall be loving.
Perfect Tenses (Active Voice లో) అన్నియూ ఆయా Tenses కు చెందిన ‘have’ verb తో కూడిన Past Participles నుండి ఏర్పడును.
I have loved.
I had loved.
I shall have loved. Passive Voice మాత్రము అయా tenses కు చెందిన ‘be’ verb తో కూడిన Past Participles నుండి
-ఏర్పడును.
I am loved.
I was loved.
I shall be loved.

268. Participles నామవాచక పదములను, సర్వనామపదములను కూడా quality చేయునని చదివి యుంటిమి. వానిని ఈ విధముగా ప్రయోగించవచ్చును.
(1) వివరణ రూపంలో (Attributively)
A rolling stone gathers no moss.
His tattered coat needs mending.
A lost opportunity never returns.
(2) ఊహా రూపకమైన భావములకు (Predicatively)
The man seems worried. (Modifying the Subject)
He kept me waiting. (Modifying the Object.)
(3) Noun ను గాని pronoun ను గాని సంపూర్ణ భావముతో ముందున పెట్టుకొనినపుడు :
The weather being fine, I went out.
Many having arrived, we were freed from anxiety.
Weather permitting, there will be a garden party at Government House tomorrow.
God willing, we shall have another good monsoon.
The sea being smooth, we went for sail.
The wind having failed, the crew set to work with a will.
His master being absent, the business was neglected.
The wind being favourable, they embarked.
పై వాక్యములలో Participle మరియు దానికి ముందున నున్న noun తో గాని pronoun తో గాని కలిసి ఒక independent phrase గానగుచున్నది. మిగతా వాక్యముతో సంబంధము ఉండదు. దానిని Absolute Phrase అంటారు. ఆ Absolute Phrase లో నున్న noun ను గాని pronoun ను గాని Nominative Absolute అంటారు.

269. పైన ఉదహరించిన Absolute phrase ను subordinate clause గా తేలికగా మార్చవచ్చు. Spring advancing, the swallows appear. When spring advances. – Clause of Time.] The sea being smooth, we went for a sail. (Because the sea was smooth. God willing, we shall meet again. (If God is willing. – Clause of Condition.).
– Clause of Reason.]

270. Participle ను verb-adjective అని అంటాము. కావున, అది ఎప్పుడూ noun కు గాని pronoun కు గాని అంటిపెట్టుకొని ఉండవలయును. అనగా అది reference కొరకు తన subject తో కలిసి
ఉండవలయును.
ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములు లోపభూయిష్ట మైనవి. ఎందుకంటే Participle కు సరియైన subject పదము తోడుగా లేదు.
1. Standing at the gate, a scorpion stung him.
(As it is, the sentence reads as if the scorpion was standing at the gate.)
2. Going up the hill, an old temple was seen.
3. Entering the room, the light was quite dazzling.
కావున, పై వాక్యములను ఈ క్రింది విధంగా రాయాలి.

1. Standing at the gate, he was stung by a scorpion.
Or: While he was standing at the gate, a scorpion stung him.
2. When we went up the hill, we saw an old temple.
3. Entering the room, I found the light quite dazzling.
Or: When I entered the room, the light was quite dazzling.

271. Usage (వాడుక సరళి) కొన్ని సార్లు subject యొక్క తోడు లేకుండా participle ను వాడడానికి
ఒప్పుకుంటుంది. అటువంటి participle ను Impersonal Absolute అని అంటారు.
Taking everything into consideration, the Magistrate was perfectly justified in issuing those orders.
Considering his abilities, he should have done better.
Roughly speaking, the distance from here to the nearest railway station is two miles.
పై వాక్యములలో పైకి కనిపించని subject యిదమిద్దము అని చెప్పడానికి వీలుకానట్టిది. కావున “Roughly speaking” అనగా ‘generally అని అర్ధము.

272. ఈ క్రింది వాక్యములలో Participle భావము ఉన్నదని అర్ధం చేసుకొనవచ్చును. Sword (being) in hand, he rushed on the jailor.
Breakfast (having been) over, we went out for a walk.

అభ్యాసము 51
ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన వాక్యములలో Present Participle ఏదో Past Participle ఏవో కనుగొని అవి ఏ రకముగా ఉపయోగించబడినవో తెలుపుము.
1. Generally speaking, we receive what we deserve.
2. Having gained truth, keep truth.
3. I saw the storm approaching.
4. Hearing a noise, I turned round.
5. Considering the facts, he received scant justice.
6. The enemy, beaten at every point, fled from the field.
7. Being dissatisfied, he resigned his position.
8. The rain came pouring down in torrents.
9. Having elected him President, the people gave him their loyal support.
10.The traveller, being weary, sat by the woodside to rest.

అభ్యాసము 52
ఈ క్రింద ఇవ్వబడిన వాక్యములలో Present Participle ఏవో Past Participle ఏవో కనుగొని అవి ఏ రకంగా ఉపయోగించబడినవో తెలుపును. но вги ан
1. The fat of the body is fuel laid away for use.
2. Being occupied with important matters, he had no leisure to see us.
3. The children coming home from school look in at the open door.
4. Michael, bereft of his son Luke, died of a broken heart.
5. Books read in childhood seem like old friends.
6. Lessons learned easily are soon forgotten.
7. A word fitly spoken is like apples of gold in pictures (baskets) of silver.
8. mSeeing the sunshine, I threw open the window.
9. Seizing him by the arm, his friend led him away.
10. Encouraged by his wife, he persevered.
11. Overcome by remorse, he determined to atone for his crime by liberality to the church.

Paraphrasing : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

అధ్యాయము 44

Paraphrasing

Paraphrasing అనగా భావమును వేరే మాటలలో ఇంకొంచం వివరంగా చెప్పుట. ఒక passage ని తన స్వంత మాటలలో, స్వంత style (స్వంత సరళిలో) చెప్పుట అని అర్ధం.

1. Uses Of Paraphrasing

ఒకాయన paraphrasing అంటే good english ని bad english లో చెప్పుట అని హేళనగా అన్నాడట. ఒక వేళ paraphrasing చెడిపోతే, అది paraphrasing తప్పు కాదు. Paraphrasing చేయడంలో తప్పు. విద్యార్థి paraphrasing ను practise చెయ్యాలి. టీచరు వానికి ఆ అలవాటు అలవడేటట్లు చూడాలి. Paraphrasing వలన రెండు ప్రధానమైన ఉపయోగాలు ఉన్నవి.

(a) As an Exercise in composition
(1) విద్యార్థి తాను చదివినది అర్థం చేసుకొని అదే విషయం తెలుసుకోడానికి ఇది ఒక పరీక్ష కావున చదవడంలో, రాయడంలో విద్యార్థికి ఇది ఒక training. భావమేమిటో, అర్ధమేమిటో తెలుసుకోకుండా paraphrasing చెయ్యడం అసాధ్యం.
(2) భావాన్ని చక్కగా వ్యక్తీకరించడానికి paraphrasing ఒక మంచి training అని చెప్పవచ్చును. తను చెప్పదలుచుకున్నది చెప్పడానికి, clear గా సూటిగా చెప్పడానికి యిది చాలా బాగా తోడ్పడుతుంది. Grammer లో తప్పులు దొర్లకుండా, వాడుక భాషలో (Idiomatic language) చెప్పడానికి paraphrasing ఎంతో ఉపయోగపడుతుంది.
“ఒక వ్యక్తి చక్కగా చదవడం, చక్కగా రాయడం నేర్చుకున్నాడంటే అతను మంచి విద్యావంతుడు అని

(b) Paraphrasing వలన రెండవ ఉపయోగం ఏమిటంటే, వ్యక్తికి ఒక భావంపై సరియైన వివరణ యిచ్చే శక్తి వస్తుంది. చిక్కుముడిగానున్న poetry ని విడదీసి, వివరించి చెప్పడం అవడుతుంది. యీ పద్ధతి poetry లో annotations రాయడానికి బాగా ఉపయోగపడుతుంది.
ఉదాహరణకు Palgrave గారు రచించిన “Golden Treasury” (Oxford University Press) లోని note ను చూడండి. ఈ note ను ఆయన Browning గారు రచించిన ఈ క్రింది verse ను గురించి రాశారు.
Enough now, if the Right
And Good and Infinite
Be named here, as thou callest thy hand thine own.
With knowledge absolute,
Subject to no dispute.
From fools that crowded youth, nor let these feel alone.

Paraphrasing Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

Read and Learn more Written Composition

Note :- ఈ శకంలో మన చేతులపై మనకెంత అవగాహన ఉందో అంతే అవగాహన మనకు Right and Wrong, Good and Evil, the Changing and the Eternal పైన గూడా ఉంటే, అంతవరకు చాలును.

II. ఒక మంచి Paraphrase యొక్క లక్షణాలు
(Chracterstics Of A Good Paraphrase)

1 . Translation. ఒక విధంగా Para Phrasing Translation జాతికి (విధానానికి చెందినది అని కూడా చెప్పవచ్చు. మనకు అవగాహన అయిన translation లో ఒక భాష నుండి ఇంకొక భాషలోనికి తర్జుమా ఉంటుంది. ఇక్కడ translation ఒకే భాషలో ఒకరి భావధోరణి నుండి ఇంకొకరి భావధోరణిలోనికి అదే భాషలో మార్పు చెందుతుంది. సాధారణంగా translation చాలా సునిశితంగా, ఒక విషయాన్ని చక్కని రూపంలో చిత్రించడం ఉంటుంది. అదే విధంగా paraphrase కూడా original passage లోని భావాన్ని రూపంలో మార్పు లేకుండా వివరించడం జరగాలి.
మరీ కటువుగా లేక క్లుప్తంగా ఉన్న passage ని translation లో విడమర్చి భావయుక్తంగా చెప్పాలి. Bacon గారి ఈ క్రింది passage ని పరిశీలించండి. Ag

Prosperity doth best discover vice, but Adversity doth best discover virtue.
Paraphrase.- When a man is prosperous, there is more chance of his bad qualities coming to light; but when he is unfortunate or in trouble, his good qualities are more likely to show themselves.

కేవలం పదగాంభీర్యంతో నిండిన passage ని translation లో కుదింపు చెయ్యాలి. Oxford లో తన lecture లో ఈ విధానాన్ని Ruskin గారు చక్కగా చూపించారు. ఆయన ఇలా చెప్పారు : “Sir, your house is on fire.”

Sydney Smith గారు ఈ క్రింది passage లో ఆయన పెద్ద పెద్ద మాటలు, కేవలం అలంకారప్రాయమైన భాషను వాడారు. దీనిని simple language గా మార్చవలసిన అవసరం ఉంది.

Whoever had the good fortune to see Dr. Parr’s wig, must have observed that, while it tres- passes a little on the orthodox magnitude of perukes in the anterior parts, it scorns even episcopal limits behind, and swells out into a boundless convexity of frizz.

Paraphrase. All who have seen Dr. Parr’s wig must have been struck with its enormous size. Even in front it is larger than the usual style of wig; but behind it is fuller even than the wigs worn by bishops, and swells out into a gigantic round of curls.

2. Fullness. (పరిపూర్ణత) Summary రాసే పద్ధతికి మరియు precis రాసే పద్ధతికి paraphrase ను రూపొందించే పద్ధతికి తేడాలు ఉన్నవి. Paraphrase లో original అర్ధము, వివరణలు, అసలు విషయము. పూర్తిగా ఉంటాయి. అనగా paraphrase full reproduction గా ఉంటుంది. ఈ క్రింది verse ను summary గాను paraphrase గాను చూపించి వివరించడం జరిగింది.

The glories of our blood and state
Are shadows, not substantial things:
There is no armour against fate;
Death lays his icy hand on kings;
Sceptre and Crown kings.
Must tumble down.
And in the dust be equal made
With the poor crooked scythe and spade.

Summary. – High birth and rank are nothing : for in death, which claims all, peasants are equal with

Paraphrase. Nobility of birth and exalted rank, of which men so proudly boast, are mere illusions and quickly pass away. They cannot protect their proud possessors from the common fate of all mankind-death. Even kings, like the meanest of their subjects, must die; and in the grave the poor peasant is equal with the haughty monarch.

Original Passage లో ఉన్న కథా సంగ్రహము యావత్తు నీ స్వంత భావాలను అందులో చొప్పించడానికి వీలు కాదు. Paraphrase లో passage లోని యధార్థం యధార్థంగా ఉంటుంది.

Original passage కి paraphrase కు length విషయంలో ఖచ్చితమైన rules, నిబంధనలు ఏమీ లేవు. కాని paraphrase లో అర్థాన్ని సరిచేయడానికి sentence ను పొడిగించవచ్చు. సాధారణంగా paraphrase original passage అంత గాని, అంత కంటే కొంచం ఎక్కువగా గాని ఉంటుంది.

పైన చెప్పిన ఉదాహరణలో verse కు 45 పదాలు ఉన్నవి. Summary లో 17 పదాలు, paraphrase
లో 56 పదాలు ఉన్నవి.

3. Wholeness. (ఉన్నదంతా ఉంచటం). Paraphrasing చేసేటప్పుడు passage మొత్తాన్ని ఒక unit 30ño. Passage original line original line m, original sentence original sentence ను గాను తీసుకొని దానిని కొత్త పదములతో నింపడం paraphrase కాదు. మొత్తం passage ని, దానిలోని అంతర్గత భావాన్ని ముందుగా గ్రహించాలి. ఆ తరువాత paraphrase ని మొదలు పెట్టాలి. Passage ని ఆ విధంగా రచయిత రాయడానికి గల background ని గ్రహించాలి. ఇది అంత తేలికైన పని కాదు. ఊహా పటిమ ఉండాలి. Imagination ఉండాలి. ఇన్ని లక్షణాలు ఉన్నపుడే చక్కని paraphrase వస్తుంది.

ఈ క్రింది Sonnet ను (పద్యము) మీరు translate చేయబోవుచున్నారు అనుకొందాము.

“Much have I travelled in the realm’s of gold,
And many goodly states and kingdoms seen;
Round many western islands have I been.
Which bards in fealty to Apollo hold.
Oft of one wide expanse had I been told
That deep browed Homer ruled as his demesne;
Yet did I never breathe its pure serene Til!
I heard Chapman speak out loud and bold; –
Then felt I like some watcher of the skies
When a new planet swims into his ken:
Or like stout Cortez, when with eagle eyes.
He stared at the Pacific-and all his men
Looked at each other with a wild surmise –
Silent, upon a peak in Darien.

– Keats

ఇచ్చట mechanical (యాంత్రికంగా) line తర్వాత line ను paraphrase చెయ్యడం కుదరదు. Paraphrasing చేసేటప్పుడు passage యొక్క central meaning ను ముందు అవగాహన చేసుకోవాలి. Central meaning అనగా ఏమిటి? Central meaning ఈ విధంగా ఉంటుంది.

Keats had read widely in English literature, especially poetry, but he knew nothing of the poetic literature of ancient Greece until he read Chapman’s translation of Homer’s Illiad. This was a revelation to him; and as he read, he felt all the wonder and joy felt by an astronomer when he discovers a new star, or an explorer when he discovers an unknown ocean.

4. A Complete Piece of Prose. Paraphrase ను చక్కగా చేసినపుడు అది idiomatic English లో ఉన్న ఒక సరికొత్త నమూనా లా ఉంటుంది. Original passage కి సంబంధం లేకుండా (రచనాశైలిలో) అది నవీనత్వంలో తొణికిసలాడుతూ ఉండాలి. పాఠకులకు అది ఆనందాన్ని కలిగించాలి. చక్కగా అర్ధం కావాలి. Paraphrase యొక్క original ను చదవకుండానే దాని భావం క్షుణ్ణంగా అర్ధం కావాలి.

(గమనిక (Note: Paraphrase కు Explanatory notes అంటూ ఏమీ ఉండరాదు. మనం ఇచ్చే explanation (వివరణ) యావత్తూ paraphrase యొక్క body లోనే ఇమిడి ఉండవలయును. ఒక వేళ చివరలో explanatory note రాసినట్లయితే paraphrase ని రూపొందించడంలో మీరు కొన్ని పొరపాట్లు చేసినట్లు అర్ధం వస్తుంది.)

Paraphrase చక్కగా రావడానికి ఈ క్రింది సూత్రాలు చాలా అవసరం

(a) మొదటి passage ని మీ స్వంత మాటలతో రూపొందించాలి.

(b) మొదటి paraphrase ని అదేవిధంగా paraphrase లోనికి దిగుమతి చేయరాదు.

(C) స్వతంత్ర భావాలు కలిగి ఉండవలయును.

3. The Parapharase Of Poetry

Poetry ని paraphrase చెయ్యడానికి కావలసిన special points ఇచ్చట పొందుపరచబడినవి.

Poetry కి సంబంధించి కొన్ని చిక్కులు ఉన్నవి. Poetry ఒక భాష నుండి యింకొక భాషలోనికి trans- late చెయ్యడం కష్టం. అలా చేసినపుడు మొదటి భాషలోని Poetry యొక్క charm (ఆకర్షణ) చాలా వరకు పోతుంది. అలాగే అదే భాష యొక్క prose లో translate చేసినా కూడా charm పోతుంది.

Poetry లో నున్న భావము, నడక, spirit (శక్తి) మాటల ఒరవడి ఒక మూసలో పోసి రూపొందించినట్లు ఒకదానికొకటి కలిసిపోయి ఉంటాయి. ఈ కలయిక prose లో దెబ్బతింటుంది. Poetry లోని magic అంతా ___ rhythm (ఛందోబద్ధమైన) పదములలోని గూఢమైన దాగియున్న సంగీత భావము కూడా దెబ్బతినును. ఎంతో జాగ్రత్తగా poetry ని prose గా మార్చినా కూడా poetry బాగా దెబ్బతింటుంది. అయినను, poetry ని prose లోకి మార్చడం ద్వారా composition రాయడానికి ఉపకరిస్తుంది. భాషలో verse నకు prose నకు ఉన్న తేడాలే poetry ని paraphrasing చేయడానికి ఉన్న తీవ్రమైన అడ్డంకులు.

(a) Difference in words – Difference in words wo? Poets or archaic words (ప్రాచీనమైన పదాలు) ను వాడుతారు. అవి సాధారణంగా మనకు వాడుక భాషలో ఉండవు. ఈ పదాలు మన prose లో కూడా కనిపించవు. ఉదాహరణలు – sword కు brand song కు carol,

cottage so cot, so, merchantship so argosy, before 5 ere, over so o’er, of yore s in the past, I think I ween, often oft-times, I am of opinion I trow, anything aught, about 5 anent, scold so chide, except šo save, ancestors & forefathers, per- haps perchance, belike, haply, although so albeit, girl so damsel, , lady dame, father sire, said so quoth, &, as well so withal, in addition; to boot, almost swell-nigh, Modern poets టువంటి పదాలను తగ్గిస్తున్నారు. Paraphrasing చేయునపుడు modern పదాలనే వాడాలి.

(b) Difference in the order of words. Inversions, grammatic గమనించాలి. ఒక వాక్యము యొక్క grammatical order ను మార్చినపుడు దానిని Inversion అంటారు. subject, verb, object అనే order ను poetry లో సాధారణంగా వాడుతారు.

“Mine be a cot beside a hill;”
instead of,-May a cot beside a hill be mine.
“A barking sound the shepherd hears;”
instead of-The shepherd hears a barking sound.
“Not, Celia, that I juster am
Or better than the rest;”
instead of,-Not that I am juster, etc.

(గమనిక (Note: ఒక verse కు prose formation ఇచ్చునపుడు ఈ Inversion పద్ధతిని వాడరు. Prose లో original copy లో ఉన్న పదాలను అన్నిటినీ వాడుతాము. Prose యొక్క grammatical construction ను యథాతధంగా ఉంచడానికి అక్కడక్కడా మాటలు, చేర్పులు కూడా చేయడం జరుగుతుంది. ఈ క్రింది verse ను చూడండి.

“On Linden, when the sun was low,
All bloodless lay the untrodden snow
And dark as winter was the flow
Of Iser, rolling rapidly.

పై verse అక్కడక్కడా Inversion పద్ధతి కనిపిస్తుంది. వీటిని మార్చండి. ఇప్పుడు prose sentence ఈ విధంగా వస్తుంది.
The untrodden snow lay all bloodless on Linden when the sun was low, and the flow of (the) rapidly rolling Iser was (as) dark as winter.

(c) Flowery and ornamental language. verse రాయడంలో సర్వసాధారణంగా జరుగుతుంది. దీనిని prose లో simplify చేస్తారు. ఉదాహరణకు

“Now the golden morn aloft
Waves her dew-bespangled wing,
With vermile cheek and whisper soft
She woos the tardy Spring.”

(c) Rhythm and Rhyme. ఈ పద్ధతి verse లో బాగా వాడుకలో ఉన్నది. కాని దీనికి prose లో స్థానం లేదు. కావున paraphrasing లో దీనిని వాడరాదు.

4. Special Hints (ప్రత్యేక సూచనలు)

(a) Direct and Indirect Speech. Paraphrase రెండు పద్ధతులలో ఉంటుంది. కాని indirect speech ని తప్పనిసరిగా అవసరమైతేనే వాడవలయును. సర్వసాధారణంగా direct speech నే వాడుతారు. Indian students కు indirect speech లో రాయడానికి కొన్ని ఇబ్బందులు ఉన్నవి.
fields.

(b) Metaphors. Metaphors ను similies లో రాయడం మంచిది. ఉదాహరణకు “Silently, one by one, in the infinite meadows of Heaven,
Blossomed the lovely stars, the forget-me-nots of the angels.”

దీనిని ఈ క్రింది విధంగా రాయవచ్చును.
The stars came out one by one silently in the vast sky, like forget-me-nots flowering in the

కొన్ని సందర్భాలలో, metaphor ను పూర్తిగా drop చెయ్యవచ్చును. అప్పుడు వాడుక భాషకు వాడవలయును. ఇచ్చట Keats గారు రాసిన ఒక sonnet లోని మొదటి వాక్యాన్ని చూడండి.
“Much have I travelled in the realms of gold”
పై line ను prose లో ఇలా రాస్తాము.
I have read widely in classical literature.

(c) Abstract used for concrete (దృగ్గోచరమైన దానికి ఊహాజనితమైన భావాన్ని ఇవ్వడం) Concrete భావానికి బదులుగా ఊహాజనితమైన భావాన్ని వాడినపుడు, concrete కే ప్రాధాన్యం ఇవ్వాలి. ఇచ్చట ఈ తేడాను చూడండి.
“Let not ambition mock their useful toil,”
దీనిని ఇలా రాయవచ్చు.
Ambitious men should not despise the useful labour of poor peasants.

(d) Rhetorical questions. Rhetorical questions ను direct గా అంగీకరించునట్లుగా గాని direct గా తిరస్కరించునట్లుగా గాని మార్చవచ్చును.
“Are we not better armed than our foes?”
We are better armed than our enemies;
“Is thy servant a dog that he should do this thing?”
I am not so contemptible a creature as to commit such a crime.

(e) Exclamations. (sudden గా, ఆశ్చర్యంగా మాటలు వెలిబుచ్చుట) ఈ exclamations గా ఉండవలయును. ఉదాహరణకు “O ! for a lodge in some vast wilderness!”
దీనిని ఈ విధంగా paraphrase చెయ్యవచ్చును.
I wish I had a secluded (so) refuge remote from human society.

(f) Apostrophe. Poem second person & paraphrase, plural “you” వాడడం మంచిది. Singular ‘thou’ అంత ఉపయోగకరం కాదు. ‘Thou’ అను పదాన్ని ordinary prose లో వాడరు. Verb ని second person plural భావములో వాడడం చాలా తేలిక. ఏ పద్ధతిని ఇచ్చట అవలంభించినా, చివరి వరకు, దానినే కొనసాగించడం మంచిది. వాక్యము ప్రథమ భాగంలో ‘thou’ ని వాడి చివరలో ‘you’ వాడడం చాలా తప్పు. Third person లో కూడా passage రాయవచ్చు. Mathew Arnold రాసిన Shakespere లోని మొదటి line చూడండి. “Thou art free !” We can freely criticise other authors, but Shakespeare is beyond our criticism.

5. Method Of Procedure

1. తనకు అర్ధం కాని passage ని ఎవరూ కూడా paraphrase చెయ్యలేరు. Passage నిదానంగా, శ్రద్ధగా చదవండి. దాని general meaning బాగా అర్ధమైన దాని ఒక అవగాహనకు రండి. ఒకసారి చదివితే అర్ధం కాకపోతే, రెండవసారి చదవండి. మరల మరల చదవండి. సంపూర్ణముగా అర్ధమయ్యేవరకు చదవండి. ఇది మొదటి మెట్టు మరియు చాలా ముఖ్యమైనది. ఈ stage లో ఒక చిన్న summary ని రాయండి.

2. తరువాత, వివరాలు తెలుసుకోవడానికి, passage ని మరల చదవండి. కష్టమైన పదాలను note చేసుకోండి. Grammer points ను idioms ను రాసుకోండి. passage ని మీ స్వంత మాటలలో రాయడానికి సిద్ధం కండి.

3. Passage యొక్క అన్ని హంగులూ, passage యొక్క ప్రధానాంశము ఇప్పుడు మీ అవగాహనలో ఉంటుంది. ఇప్పుడు paraphrase యొక్క rough outline మీ చేతిలో ఉంటుంది. Simple English లో paraphrase ని తయారు చేసుకొనండి. Original passage లోని అన్ని వివరాలూ వచ్చినవో లేదో ఒకసారి సరి చూసుకోండి.

4. Passage మొత్తాన్ని సంగ్రహంగా గ్రహించండి. మాట తర్వాత మాట తు. చ. తప్పకుండా para- phrase లో పెట్టవద్దు. Line వెంబడి line ను passage లో నుండి తీసి paraphrase లో అతికించవద్దు. ప్రారంభం నుండి కూడా అంతిమంలో ఏమి రాయబోవుచున్నామో మనస్సులో ఉంచండి.

5. వాక్యముల యొక్క వరుస క్రమాన్ని మీరు సరిదిద్దుకోవచ్చు. ఒక్కొక్కపుడు paragraph ని కూడా re- arrange చేసుకోవచ్చు. Meaning మాత్రం clear గా ఉండాలి.

6. పెద్ద పెద్ద వాక్యాలను చిన్నవిగా సరిదిద్దండి. అనవసరమైన చిన్న వాక్యాలు ఉంటే ఒకే పెద్ద వాక్యంగా సరిదిద్దుకోవచ్చు. ఈ విధంగా చేస్తే, అర్ధం చేసుకోవడం సులభతరం అవుతుంది.

7. కేవలం ఒక మార్పు చెయ్యాలి అనే సంకల్పములో పదములను అనవసరంగా మార్చవద్దు. ఏ word కూడా ఇంకొక word ని పూర్తిగా అధిగమించలేదు. Passage లోని చక్కని పదములను అనవసరంగా మార్చవద్దు. కేవలం పదగాంభీర్యంతో ఉన్న పదములను, పాతకాలంనాటి పదములను తీసివేసి వానికి తగిన synonym పదములను ప్రయోగించవచ్చును.

N. B. – వాడుక భాషలో సామాన్యంగా వాడుకలో నున్న పదములను తీసి వాని చోటులో కేవలం పదగాంభీర్యం ఉన్న difficult words ను వాడరాదు.
మాట వరుసకు argument అనే simple పదానికి ‘ratiocination’ అనే పదాన్ని వాడరాదు.

8. Paraphrase కు explanatory notes ను (వివరణ కోసం additional గా ఇచ్చే notes) వాడరాదు. Paraphrase యొక్క body matter లోనే అవన్నీ రావాలి.

9. Indirect speech లో ‘saying verb’ ని తప్పుగా వాడడం వలన sentence మొత్తం చెడిపోతుంది. “Verb of saying” ను పలుసార్లు repeat చేయకూడదు.
e.g.
‘The poet says that’-‘The poet further says’
The poet again remarks that’, and so on,
“Verb of saying” ను ఒకవేళ వాడదలుచుకుంటే ఒకే ఒక్కసారి వాక్యమునకు ముందు వాడుము. Tod

10. ఒక చిత్తు ప్రతిని (rough draft) తయారు చేయండి. (మీరు చాలా చిత్తు ప్రతులను తయారు చేసుకోవలసి ఉంటుంది) Revise చెయ్యండి. Original passage తో compare చెయ్యండి. ఏ detail కూడా miss అవ్వరాదు. Original passage ని కాపీ కొట్టరాదు.
Punctuation తప్పులను సరిదిద్దండి. ప్రతి idiom ఆ వాక్యానికి అందానిస్తున్నదా అని ఒకసారి ప్రశ్నించుకోండి.
– పెద్దగా ఒకసారి చదవండి. ఉచ్ఛారణలో గంభీరత ఉన్నదో లేదో పరీక్షించుకోండి.

11. ఇంత కష్టపడిన తరువాత మీ paraphrase చక్కగా కుదిరినది అని మీకు విశ్వాసం కలిగితే, final copy ని ఇప్పుడు రాయండి.

Specimens (నమూనాలు)
-1-

Breathes there the man, with soul so dead,
Who never to himself hath said,
This is my own, my native land?
Whose heart hath ne’er within him burn’d.
As home his footsteps he hath turn’d.
From wandering on a foreign strand?
If such there breathe, go, mark him well;
For him no Minstrel raptures swell;
High though his titles, proud his name,
Boundless his wealth as wish can claim;
Despite those titles, power, and pelf,
The wretch, concentred ail in self, Living,
shall forfeit fair renown,
And, doubly dying, shall go down.
To the vile dust, ffom whence he sprung.
Unwept, unhonour’d, and unsung,

-Scoff

Paraphrase

It is difficult to believe that any man can be so spiritually dead as to have no love for his native country after travelling in foreign lands. But if such an unpatriotic person does exist, take careful note of his career; and you will find that he will never inspire poets to celebrate him in deathless song. He may be a man of high rank, of noble family and of riches beyond the dreams of avarice; but these great advantages will not save him from oblivion. In spite of them all, he will win no fame during his lifetime; and when he dies he will die in a double sense. His body will return to the dust whence it came, and his name will be forgotten. None will weep for him, none will honour him, and no poet will keep his name alive in immortal poetry.

-2-

Heaven from all creatures hides the book of fate,
All but the page prescribed, their present state:
‘From brutes what men, from men what spirits know;
Or who could suffer being here below?
The lamb thy riot dooms to bleed to-day,
Had he thy reason, would he skip and play?
Pleased to the last, he crops the flow’ry food.
And licks the hand just rais’d to shed his blood y’
“Oh, blindness to the future! kindly giv’n,
That each may fill the circle mark’d by Heav’n.
Who sees with equal eyes, as God of all,
A hero perish, or a sparrow fall.

-Pope

Paraphrase

It would be impossible for us to continue living in this world if each of us knew exactly what fate had in store for him. So God in His mercy conceals (he future from all His creatures, and reveats only the present. He hides from the animals what men know, and He hides from men what the angels know. For example, if a lamb had reason like a man, it could not gambol happily, knowing it was destined to be killed for human food. But, being quite ignorant of its fate, it is happy to the last minute of its short life contentedly grazing in the flowery meadow, and even in its innocence licks the hand of the butcher who is about to slaughter it. What a blessing it is that we are ignorant of the future! God, to Whom the death of a sparrow is of equal importance with the death of a hero, has in His mercy thus limited our knowledge, so that we might fulfil our duty in the sphere to which He has appointed us.

-3-

Perseverance is the very hinge of all virtues. On looking over the world, the cause of nine- tenths of the lamentable failures which occur in men’s undertakings, and darken and degrade so much of their history, (res not in the want of talents, or the will to use them, but in the vacillating and desultory mode of using them, in flying from object to object, in staring away at each little disgust, and thus applying the force which might conquer any one difficulty to a series of difficulties, so large that no human force can conquer them. The smallest brook on earth, by continuing to run, has hollowed out for itself a considerable valley to flow in. Commend me therefore to the virtue of perseverance. Without it all the rest are little better than fairy gold, which glitters in your purse, but when taken to market proves to be slate or cinders.

-Carlyle

Paraphrase

All the virtues depend on the one virtue of perseverance. It is lack of perseverance, not lack of ability, that is the cause of most of the sad failures that stain the history of mankind. It is because men do not persevere in overcoming one difficulty at a time, that they fail. Instead of sticking to one aim in life until it is realized, they hesitate, get discouraged at every small rebuff, change from one aim to another, and so create for themselves such a series of difficulties as can never be overcome by human power. Hence they fail to accomplish anything. Even a small stream will carve out for itself a deep and wide channel simply by constantly flowing. Without perseverance, all the other virtues are like the deceitful fairy gold of the fairy-tales, which turns to worthless stones when you try to use it as money in the shops.

అభ్యాసము 164
ఈ క్రింది వానిని Paraphrase చేయుము.

1. Some murmur, when their sky is clear
And wholly bright to view,
If one small speck of dark appear

Trench

2. In their great heaven of blue :
And some with thankful love are filled,
If but one streak of light,
One ray of God’s good mercy, gild
The darkness of their night.
Lives of great men all remind us
We can make our lives sublime,
And, departing, leave behind us,
Footprints on the sands of time;
Footprints, that perhaps, another,
Sailing o’er life’s solemn main;
A forlorn, and shipwreck’d brother
Seeing, shall take heart again.

-Longfellow

3. More things are wrought by prayer
Than this world dreams of. Wherefore, let thy voice
Rise like a fountain for me night and day.
For what are men better than sheep or goats
That nourish a blind life within the brain,
If, knowing God, they lift not hands of prayer.
Both for themselves and those who call them friends!

-Tennyson

4.In such a world; so thorny, and where none
Finds happiness unblighted; or, if found,
Without some thistly sorrow at its side;
It seems the part of wisdom, and no sin
Against the law of love, to measure lots
With less dislinguish’d than ourselves, that thus
We may with patience bear our moderate ills,
And sympathize with others suffering more,

-Cowper

5. Children we are all
Of one great father, in whatever clime
Nature or chance hath cast the seeds of life-
All tongues, all colours; neither after death
Shall we be sorted into languages
And tints, white, black, and tawny,
Greek and Goth,
Northmen, and offspring of hot Africa:
The All-father, He in Whom we live and move;
He, the indifferent Judge of ail, regards
Nations, and hues, and dialects alike:
According to their works shall they be judged
When even-handed Justice in the scale
Their good and evil weighs.

-Southey

6. Beside yon straggling fence that skirts the way.
With blossom’d furze unprofitably gay,
There, in his noisy mansion, skill’d to rule,
The village master taught his little school:
A man severe he was, and stern to view,-
I knew him well, and every truant knew,

-Goldsmith

7. Well had the boding tremblers learn’d to trace
The day’s disasters in his morning face;
Full well they laugh’d with counterfeited glee,
At all his jokes,-for many a joke had he;
Full well the busy whisper, circling round.
Convey’d the-dismal tidings when he frown’d;
Yet he was kind; or if severe in aught,
The love he bore to learning was in fault.
Hark! ’tis the twanging horn. O’er yonder bridge,
That with its wearisome but needful length
Bestrides the wintry flood, in which the moon
Sees her unwrinkled face reflected bright,
He comes, the herald of a noisy world,
With spattered boots, trappped waist and frozen locks.
News from all nations lumbering at his back,
True to his charge, the close-packed load behind,
Yet careless what he brings, his one concern
Is to conduct it to the destined inn,
And, having dropped the expected bag, pass on
He whistles as he goes, light-hearted wretch,
Cold and yet cheerful messenger of grief
Perhaps to thousands and of joy to some,
To him indifferent whether grief or joy.

-Cowper

8. Be it a weakness, it deserves some praise,
We love the play-place of our early days,
The scene is touching and the heart is stone
That feels not at the sight, and feels at none;
The wall on which we tried our graving skill,
The very name we carved subsisting still,
The bench on which we sat while deep-employed.
Though mangled, hacked, and hewed, not yet destroyed;
The little ones, unbuttoned, glowing hot,
Playing our games and on the very spot;
The pleasing spectacle at once excites
Such recollection of our own delights,
That viewing it, we seem almost to obtain
Our innocent sweet simple years again.

-Cowper

9. Since trifles make the sum of human things,
And half our misery from our foibles springs;
Since life’s best joys consist in peace and ease,
And few can save or serve, but all may please;
Oh I let th’ ungentle spirit learn from hence,
A small unkindness is a great offence.
Large bounties to restore, we wish in vain,
But all may shun the guilt of giving pain.
To bless mankind with tides of flowing wealth,
With power to grace them, or to crown with health,
Our little lot denies, but heaven decrees
To all the gift of ministring ease:
The mild forbearance at another’s fault;
The taunting word, suppress’d as soon as thought;
On these Heaven bade the bliss of life depend,
And erush’d ill fortune when it made a friend.

-Hanmah More

10. Now came still Evening on, and
Twilight grey Had in her sober livery all things clad.
Silence accompanied-for beast and bird,
They to their grassy couch, those to their nests,
Were slunk-all but the wakeful nightingale ;
She all night long her amorous descant sung.
Silence was pleased. Now glow’d the firmament
With living sapphires. Hesperus, that led
The starry host, rode brightest, till the moon,
Rising in clouded majesty at length.
Apparent queen, unveil’d her peerless light,
And o’er the dark her silver mantle threw.

-Milton

11. These few precepts in thy memory
See thou character. Give thy thoughts no tongue,
Nor any unproportioned thought his act
Be thou familiar, but by no means vulgar.
Those friends thou hast, and their adoption tried,
Grapple them to thy soul with hoops of steel;
But do not dull thy palm with entertainment
Of each new-hatched, unfledged comrade.,
Beware Of entrance to a quarrel, but being in,
Bear’t that the opposed may beware of thee.
Give every man thy ear, but few thy voice,
Take each man’s censure, but reserve thy judgement.
Costly thy habit as thy purse can buy.
But not expressed in fancy; rich, not gaudy;
For the apparel often proclaims the man.
Neither a borrower nor a lender be;
For loan oft loses both itself and friend,
And borrowing dulls the edge of husbandry.

12. If misery be the effect of virtue, it ought to be reverenced; if of ill-fortune, to be pitied; and if of vice, not to be insulted; because it is, perhaps, itself a punishment adequate to the crime by which it was produced; and the humanity of that man can deserve no panegyric who is capable of reproaching a criminal in the hands of the executioner.

-Johnson

13. We are all short-sighted, and very often see but one side of a matter; our views are not extended to all that has a connection with it. From this defect I think no man is free. We see but in part, and we know but in part, and therefore it is no wonder we conclude not right from our partial views. This might instruct the proudest esteemer of his own parts how useful it is to talk and consult with others, even such as come short of him in capacity, quickness, and penetration; for since no one sees ail, and we generally have different prospects of the same thing, according to our different, as I may sav, positions to it, it is not incongruous to think, nor beneath any man to try, whether another man may not have notions of things which have escaped him, and which his reason would make use of if they came into his mind.

-Locke

14. All the performances of human art, at which we look with praise or wonder, are instances of the resistless force of perseverance; it is by this that the quarry becornes a pyramid, and that distant countries are united by canals. If a man was to compare the effect of a single stroke of a pickaxe, or of one impression of the spade, with the general design and last result, he would be overwhelmed by the sense of their disproportion; yet those petty operations, incessantly continued, in time surmount the greatest difficulties, and mountains are levelled, and oceans bounded, the slender force of human beings.

– Johnson

15. The proverbial oracles of our parsimonious ancestors have informed us that the fatal waste of fortune is by small expenses, by the profusion of sums too little singly to alarm our caution, and which we never suffer ourselves to consider together. Of the same kind is prodigality of life; he that hopes to look back hereafter with satisfaction upon past years must leam to know the present value of single minutes, and endeavour to let no particle of time fall useless to the ground. An Italian philosopher expressed in his motto that time was his estate; an estate indeed, that will produce nothing without cultivation, but will always abundantly repay the labours of industry, and satisfy the most extensive desires, if no part of it be suffered to lie waste by negligence, to be overrun by noxious plants, or laid out for show rather than

-Johnson for use.

16. Mr Hampden was a gentleman of a good extraction and a fair fortune, who from a life of great pleasure and license had on a sudden retired to extraordinary sobriety and strictness, and yet retained his usual cheerfulness and affability; which, together with the opinion of his wisdom and justice and the courage he had shewed in opposing the ship-money, raised his reputation to a very great height, not only in Buckinghamshire where he lived, but generally throughout the kingdom. He was not a man of many words, and rarely began than discourse, or made the first entrance upon any business that was assumed; but a very weighty speaker, and after he had heard a full debate, and observed how the House was like to be inclined, took up the argument, and shortly and clearly and craftily so stated it that he commonly conducted it to the conclusion he desired; and if he found he could not do that, hie was never without the dexterity to divert the debate to another time and to prevent the determining of anything in the negative which might prove inconvenient in the future.

– Clarendon

Analysis : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

Analysis

Def: A Sentence is a group of words which makes complete sense.
Analysis అనగా వాక్యములను (sentence) అవి యే యే భాగములు గూడి అయినవో వానిని అట్టి భాగముల క్రింద విడదీయుట.

The chief parts of a sentence are the subject and the Predicate. If the Verb is transitive, there is also an object. A sentence may contain only one subject and one predi- cate; or more subjects than one and more predicates than one.

Def: A sentense which contains only one subject and one predicate is called a Simple sentence as :

1. Birds fly.
2. I brought a book.

Analysis Definition And Types with Examples In Telugu

Def: A Clause is a group of words, forming part of a sentence and having a subject and a predicate of its own as: In ‘I cannot sya whenhe went away’ there are two clauses: 1. 1 cannot say. 2. When he went away.
A sentence which contains more than one subject and more than one predicate may be either Complex or compound.

Def: A sentence which contains one principal clause and one or more subordinate clauses is called a Complex sentence as : 1. It is not known who has done this. 2. I think he destroyed the letter which you sent him.

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

N.B: For ‘Principal and Subordinate’ clauses; see Chapter IX.

Def: A sentence which contains at least, two principal clauses is called a Compound sentence; as: Birds fly and fishes swim.

N.B: A compound sentence may also contain subordinate clauses depending upon the principal clause; as:- The teacher asked the boy why he was crying, but he gave no answer.

SUBJECT                                                                                               PREDICATE
No.SubjectAttributive

Adjuncts

Verbcomple

ment

objectAttributive

Adjuncts

Adverbial Adjuncts
1Fox(a) a(b)    hungrysawgrapesa) some b) fine c) hanging
upon a wall
once
2Man(a) a (b) em
ployed for
the purpose
foundstealing
a watch
thiefthe
3Boy(a)a(b) small (c) aged eightwas

bringing

water(a)    one hot summer day.

(b)    from a river.

4Ramathe son of
Dasartha
killeddemons(a) any(b)    cruela) in the forest (b) with the
greatest ease.
5Ramathe exilemadeKing of
Lanka
Vibhish-

ana

a) after Ravana’s death, b) amidst great rejoicings.
6LearThe King of
Britain
bacamcmadat the ingratitude of his
daughters.
7Fathermytaught(a)sons(b)    science(a) all, his
(b) physical
with much success
8Alexanderthe King of
Macedonia
was sur-
named
theGreatafter his conquest of the Persian Empire.

 

Simple Sentences are of five kinds :

1. An Asser. sentence simply affirms or denies some- thing (a) An Affirmative sentence states a fact: God made the world. (b) A Negative sentence denies or says ‘no’ : He did not go.
2. An Interrogative sentence asks a question: Did God make the world?
3. An Imperative sentence gives an order: Come here. Go there.
4. An Optative sentence states a wish or prayer : God save the king.
5. An Exclamatory sentence expresses a strong feeling (as an interjection does: How great God is!

The chief parts of a Simple sentence are the subject, the verb and the object. The subject or the object is always a noun or a noun equivalent. We may add the meaning of a noun (i.e. we may enlarge its meaning) by an Adjective (or an Adjective equivalent.) In analysis we call this, Enlargement of the subject or of the Object. This is also called an Adjectival adjunct or Attribute.

The essential part of the predicate is the verb. We may add to the meaning of a verb by an adverb (oranadverb equivalent) which extends its meaning. This in analysis, we call the extension of the verb; this is also called anAdverbial adjunct. Note: A verb of incomplete predication requires a complement.

Thus we have Seven parts in a sentence:
The subject and its enlargements (Attributes)
The object and its enlargements (attributes)
The verb, its complement and its extensions (adjuncts)

Let us analyse the sentence:

The good king loved his country dearly.

(1) Subject king
(2) Enlargements of the subject – the good
(3) Verb: loved
(4) Extension of the verb: dearly.
(5) Object: country
(6) Enlargement of the object : his

Examples of Analysis

(Answers are given in a tabular form on page 210)

1. Once a hungry fox saw some fine grapes hanging upon a wall.
2. A man employed for the purpose found the thief stealing awatch.
3. One hot summer day a small boy aged eight was bringing water from a river.
4. Rama, the son of Dasaratha, killed many cruel demons in the forest with the greatest ease.
5. Rama, the exile, made Vibhishana, King of Lanka after Ravana’s death, amidst great rejoicings.
6. Lear, King of Britain, became mad at the ingratitude of his daughters.
7. My father taught all his sons Physical Science with much success.
8. Alexander, the King of Macedonia, was surnamed the Great, after his conquest of the Persian Empire.

Ex. 40 B

Analyse the following Simple Sentences:

1. A tall fisherman once caught a small fish.
2. The people of Arabia often cross the sandy deserts.
3. The last straw breaks the camel’s back.
4. Your tiny fingers scarce could feel the slender little line.
5. The hungry spider carefully watched the happy little flies.
6. The little flies saw there the pretty shining web.
7. All the flies flapped their little wings.
8. Theold teacher punished the wicked boy very severely.
9. Once upon a time a certain jackal chased a ewe-sheep.
10. Once a little black ant found a large grain of wheat.
11. In Arabia much of the land is desert.
12. In the Indian village was a cart drawn by two bullocks.
13. On the otherside of the bridge a cart drawn by four horses has stopped.
14. What did you say? 15. Where have you seen him?
16. Rama was presented with a watch by his father.
17. There is no use in crying over a broken jar.
18. Krishna, the monitor of the ninth class was severely punished by his class teacher.
19. Into the valley marched slowly the whole army before night-fall.
20. The good alone are happy. Complex sentence To analyse Complex sentence we should study the na- ture of clauses.

Subordinate Clauses

There are three kinds of subordinate clauses: (1) the Noun clause, (2) the Adjective clause, and (3) the Adverb clause. (1) A Noun clause does the work of a Noun. (b) An Adjective clause does the work of an Adjective. (c) An Adverb clause does the work of an Adverb.

Noun Clauses

A Noun clause does the work of a Noun, so like a noun it may be:-

(1) (a) The object of a transitive verb:

1. We know that he is a good boy.
2. Tell me if you can spare time.
3. No one knows whether he is alive.
4. Ask him when he wrote the letter.
5. We could not tell whence the noise arose.
6. Do you know where he  The Subordinate clause is printed in italics; the word or words to which it is grammatically related are printed in thick. lives?
7. She asked him why he was weeping.
8. The king asked him how old he was.
9. We cannot say who wrote the letter.
10. Find out which of the boys broke the bench.
11.I ask that I may be given time.
12. I do not know whom I am to punish.
13. I do not know whose pen is lost.
14. Take whatever you like.
15. Take whatever steps you like.
16. I asked him what he was doing.
17. I wish to know what he was doing.
18. Tell me what you have brought.

Note (1) In the sentence 16 above, we may supply the words, “the question”, before’ what’ (e.g. – asked him (the question) what he was doing) In the sentences 17 and 18 above, we may supply the words, “the answer to the question.” before what 17: Tell me (the answer to the question), What you have brought.

In these two sentences (16, 17, 18) the what – clauses) are dependent questions, what being an interrogative pronoun. So, if the words, “the question,” may be supplied before a what – clause depending upon a verb of asking; or the words the answer, to the question before the what-clause depending upon a verb of knowing or telling, the what – clause is a noun clause.

Note-(2) See that he finishes the work soon. Take care (=see) that he does not run away with the money.

Mind (=take care) that you are not caught. Jšávo 5*5 noun caluse e ‘see’ ‘take care’ ‘mind’ esas objecte.
(b) The retained Object of a Transitive verb :- I was taught that learning is good.
(c) The Object of a Infinitive:- He asked me to say what I wanted.
(d) The Object of a Participle:- Knowing that he was a fool, I did not talk to him at all.

(e) The Object of a Gerund: We all ran to the tent on hearing that it caught fire.
(1) The Object of the Transitive meaning in the Noun: 1. There is a hope that he may recover (=It is hoped that he may recover).
2. I have suspicion that he is not honest (=1. suspect that he is not honest).
3. There is a clear proof that he stole the purse. (=1 it is clearly proved that he stole the purse).
N.B. Other nouns used in this way are belief, doubt,fear.

(g) The object of the Transitive meaning in the combi- nation (to be + adjective):
1. The captain was afraid that he could not save the ship (feared)
2. I am desirous that you should succeed (=desire)
3. I am hopeful that I shall succeed (=hope)
4. I am certain (or sure) that he is a rogue (=know).

Note In the following sentences, the that clauses coming after the same combination (to be +adjective) had better be construed as noun clauses used adverbially to the adjectives –
1. I am glad that you have passed the examination.
2. The teacher is angry that you are not attentive in the class.
3. I am sorry that he failed in his attempt.
(h) In the following sentences the that clauses are to be construed as noun clauses used adverbially to past participle –
1. Rest assured that you will be given promotion.
2. She is annoyed that you are going away.
3. The people were disgusted that Caesar should make a triumph over another Roman.
4. I was grieved that you were unnecessarily punished
5. I was surprised that he failed in the examination.
6.1 was rejoiced that you had won the suit.
7. Cursed be 1, that I did so.
8. The boy was pleased that he had won a prize.

(1) In the following sentences the that – clauses are to be construed as Noun clauses used adverbially to verbs.
1. Do not The verb to be with an adjective is similar in meaning to a trnasitive verb.” laugh at me that I say so.
2. I rejoice that you are left off without any punishment.
3. I warned him that a repetition of the mistake would cost him his job.
5. I cursed him that his whole family would perish before long.
6. Igrieved that you should be so angry.
7. I will never consent,. not that your offer is a bad one but because I do not trust you.

(2) The Object of a Preposition
1. It is plain from what you have said.
2. There is no sense in what you spoke.
3. I have no idea of what you are going to do.
4. Go whenever you like except that you must not go in the rain.
5. He daily takes batavias except when they are not available.
6. Do not depend upon what he says.

(3) The Subject of a verb-
1. That he is a good boy is well known.
2. What he said was false.
3. When he goes here is not known.
4. How this happened has to be found out.
5. Why he failed is quite clear.
6. Whether the child will recover is still doubtful.
7. Where Rama was born is unknown.
8. Who broke the slate could not be found out.
9. Which way the boy went not observed.
10. Whatever I have is yours.

Note: A noun clause may be used as a Nominative Absolute; as :-
That he took the money having been proved, it rests with him to show that he did not take it with a dishonest motive.

(4) (a) The Subjective Complement of a verb :-
1. This was what you said yesterday.
2. This is where I live.
3. My fear is that I may fail.
(b) The Objective Complement of Verb:- We have made him what he is.
(5) (a) Put in Apposition to a Noun: The fact that he is a good boy is well known.
2. Your statement that you met Govind is false.
3. The report that he was killed is untrue.
4. The idea that the sun moves round the earth was shown to be wrong.
5. There is a belief among the Hindus that the appearance of a comet foretells a national calamity.
(b) Put in Apposition to a Pronoun: It is well known that he is a good boy.
2.1 take it that you have finished the work.
3. Depend on it that I shall help you.
4. It is certain that he will be here tomorrow.

N.B. Thus it is seen that Noun clauses are always intro- duced by the Conjunctions: that, if and whether, and by the Interrogative adverbs: when, whence, where, why and how; and by the Interrogative pronouns: who, which and what; and by the Compound relatives: whatever, whichever, whoever, etc.

Adjective Clauses

An Adjective clause does the work of an adjective, so like an Adjective it qualified a noun or a pronoun.

Study the Adjective clauses in the following also:

1. The boy who came here yesterday is gone.
2. This is the book which I lost.
3. Bring me the horse that I bought.
4. Here comes the man whose foot was hurt.
5. This is the girl whom 1 wanted to marry.
6. There was no one present but pitied him.
7. Read such books as are useful.
8. This is the same story as i told you yesterday.
9. You are late again as usual.
10. I collected as many flowers as I could.
11. Do you know the time when he started?
12. Tell me the place where he lives.
13. The reason why he failed is clear.
14. This is the house in which he lived.
15. This is the boy that I spoke of.
16. We follow Mahatma Gandhi than whom India has not produced a nobler son.
17. Those who live in glass houses should not throw stones.
18. People trust those who discharge their debts.
19. He who serves his country serves God.
20. We love them who love us.
21. Whom the gods love die young.
22. Who steals my purse steals trash.
23. This is the way how you should proceed.
24. I will fulfil what I have promised.
25. Give me what you have brought.

N.B. Thus it is seen that Adjective Clauses are always introduced by the relative pronouns: who, which, that, whose, whom, but and as; and by relative adverbs: when, where, why and How.

Note-(a)

1. Do you know the time when he came here?
2. Do you know the place where he lives?
3. Tell me the reason why he was absent.
4. That is not the way how you should treat him.

In the above sentences, when, where, why and how have You are late again as (is)usual (Adj. Clause qualifying the idea contained in the Principal Clause) You are late again as (it is) usual (Adv. Clause of manner modifying are late) Who the gods love (Adj. Clause qualifying those understood).

Those die young (Main Clause). Who steals my purse (Adj. Clause qualifying the understood). He steals trash (Main Clause). time, place, reason and way respectively for their antecedents; so they are relative adverbs and they introduce adjective clauses.

Note-(b)

1. Do you know when he came here?
2. Do you know where he lives?
3. Tell me why he was absent.
4. This is not how you should behave.
In the above sentences, when, where, why and how have no antecedents as before and they introduce noun clauses.

Note-(c) In sentences 24 and 25 above, before the what clauses, the words, “the question” or the words “the answer to the question,”cannot be supplied; so those clauses must be construed as Adjective clauses qualifying the antecedent that understood before them (for purposes of analysis); for the sentence 24 means:-

What I have promised, that I willl fulfil. For purposes or understanding the meaning of the sen- tence, we may replace what by that which, when the sentence reads: I will fulfil that which I have promised.

Ex. 40 D

Pick out the Adjective Clause and give its construction:-
1. This is the boy who takes pains.
2. It is an ill wind that blows nobody good.
3. All that glitters is not gold.
4. This is the place in which Rama lived.
5. What is the cause for which you are come?
6. He would not tell the reason why he refused.
7. He is not a man whom we can trust.
8. This is the boy for whom the police have been searching.
9. Give me as many books as you can spare.
10. The news is not such as I expected.
11. I played with the same bat that he did.
12. There is none but, will agree with me.
13. There is no Hindu but knows the story of Ramayana.
14. Napoleon is a general than whom a better has not been seen.
15. The boy whose pen was lost came weeping to me.
16. This is not the time when you should play.
17. The place where it happened is not known.
18. All is well that ends well.
19. This is a gift from heaven to him who loves best.
20. We will follow Brutus than whom Rome knows no nobler son.

Adverb Clause

An adverb clause does the work of an Adverb; so it adds to the meaning of some Verb, or Adjective or another Adverb i.e. modifies it.
Adverb clauses may be classified as:- Adverb clause of (1) Time, (2) Place, (3) Manner, (4) Extent or Degree (5) Com- parison, (6) Reason or cause, (7) Result or Effect or Conse- quence, (8) Condition or Supposition (9) Purpose, and (10) Concession or Contrast.

(1) Time: When he was six years old his fathr died. It struck me as I was speaking. Wait here until I return. He came here a few minutes after you left. It is long since I heard from you. Make hay while the sun shines. He came here, before I got ready.

As soon as he came here, he heard the news. He entered the room just as the clock struck. The sun will rise so long as the world lasts. You may work as long as there is light. While walking in the dark he sprained his foot (=While he was walking in the dark etc.) Till called for this must be kept (=Till it is called for, etc.) This done, he went home (=When this had been done etc.)

(2) Place: He stood where he was without moving. Where there is a will, there is a way. Let him be arrested wherever he may be found. Go quickly whence you came. Whither thou goest I will go. Fools rush in whereangels fear to tread. Where twain (two) had thought the same good thought, there Allah’s house should be.

(3) Manner: He did as he was told. You reap as you sow.. As is the king, so are the subjects. You may do as you please. He tried to appear as if he liked it. (=He tried to appear as (he would appear) if he liked it). (You) Rewrite as (you are) directed.

Note-In the sentence “The captain set sail with as much indifference as if I had been on board the ship” the clause: as (the captain would set sail) – is an Adv. cl. of degree but not
manner.

(4) Extent or Degree: This is not true so far as I know. He ran as fast as he could. He ran so quickly that I could not overtake him. The more men have, the more they desire. The sooner he comes, the better (it is for him). He is so poor that he cannot pay his school fee.

(5) Comparison:- Rama writes better than Krishna. He is older than he looks. He is as stupid as he is lazy. You are as tall as Gopal. He is not so rich as his brother. No sooner did he see the snake, than he fell senseless.

(6) Reason or Clause: Please grant me leave, as I am not well. He cannot attend school because he is very weak. Since you spoke the truth, I excuse you. Now that you are grown up, you may manage your affairs. Seeing that the medicine did not act, he applied a fresh medicine. He yielded to the enemy, in as much as his army was thoroughly defeated. In that he himself has suffered being tempted, he is able to succour them, that are tempted. I prompted him on the ground that he was efficient.

(7) Result or Effect or Consequence He behaved in such a manner, that he was dismissed from school. Very heavy rain fell so that rivers were soon in floods. So great a fire broke out that London was burnt down.

(8) Condition:- If you work hard, you will succeed. You cannot catch the train unless you walk fast. Had I any money, I would give you some. Were I you, I should not act like that. Should I be appointed in your office, I would try to please you with my work. In case he does not show progress, he will be sent out. But that I saw it with my own eyes, I could not have believed it.

Provided (that) you promise to behave better, I shall excuse you this time. Supposing it were true how would you proceed? But that he is sick he would be here to-day. He sees very well, considering that he is sixty years of age. Whether you call in a doctor or not, he will not recover. Whether good or evil, you will have to put up with it.

(Whether it is good or evil, etc.) If necessary, we must go elsewhere (=If it is necessary etc.) Weather permitting I will come (=If weather permits, etc.) I will forgive you on condition that you do not repeat the mistake.

Note-In each of the following sentences, the main clause is not adversative in meaning; hence the subordinate clauses are to be construed as Adv. Clauses of condition and not concession. Whatever you do, be just (=whether you do this or do that etc.) Whichever way he goes, we are sure to catch him. However he acts, he will not take us by surprise.

Note: A generalizing relative pronoun or relative adjective ro relative adverb without any antecedent expressed or understood, introduces an adverb clause of condition;

(9) Purpose He worked hard that he might pass the examination. He drew his sword in order that he might defend himself. He did not touch me lest he should catch the disease. Men work so that they may earn money.

Note: As an Adverb clause of purpose shows what is wished or desired, the verb in it, is in the Subjunctive mood.

(10) Concession or Contrast:- Though he is poor, he is honest. Though much alarmed at the news, he did not lose hope (=Though he was much alarmed at the news, etc.) He wants to try again, although he has failed a number of times. Even if it rains, Ashall be present there. Weak as I am I can walk a mile without any difficulty. However intelligent you may be, you cannot

1. Generalizing relative pronouns are a special kind of relative pronouns formed by adding ever, or sever to ‘who’ ‘whom’ ‘which’ or ‘what’.
2. Generalizing relative Adjectives which are much commoner are whichever, whichsoever, whatever, whatsoever.
3. Generalizing relative adverb. However. succeed without industry. Notwithstanding that he has already slept for ten hours, he still feels sleepy. For all you say, I still like him. Cost what it might (=whatever it might cost) he would have it. He went out in spite of the fact that he had a bad cold.

However much or often he may try, he will never succeed. However rich he may get, he will not be contented. However well you may work, you cannot demand more than your stipulated pay.

Admitting that he is innocent, he might have avoided bad company. If I am dull (=though I admit that I am dull) I am at least industrious. Whatever amount or trouble he took, he would not make a fortune (=even if he took any amount of trouble etc.)

Note 1. The main clause of a sentence containing a clause of concession is adversative (-opposed) in meaning to the subordinate clause.
Note-2. When the subordinating conjunction however takes some adverb (e.g. much, well or often etc.). or some adjectives (rich, intelligent etc.) it introduces an Adverbial clause of concession.
N.B. Thus it is clearly seen that Adverb clauses are introduced by

(1) the Subordinating Conjunctions as, when, if, because, until, after, since, while, than, unless, before, etc.
(2) the conjunction that when it means so that or in order that, or when it follows so as a correlative and
(3) generalizing relatives without any antecedent expressed or understood.

Now study the following clauses :-

Who – clauses

1. (a) (a) Tell me who beat you. (N.CL.)
(b) Who did you say he was.
Note ‘Who he was’ is a noun clause of ‘did you say’. Who is the subjective complement of Inter, verb was therefore nominative (So whom is wrong).
(b) (a) I know the man who beat you. (Adj. CI.)
(b) He is a man who, I know is trustworthy. (Adj. Cl.) Note-“I know” is an adverbial clause of parenthesis; who is the subject of is trustworthy.
(c) He is a man whom I know to be trustworthy.(Adj. Cl.) Note – Here whom is the object of know.
(c) Rama sent this book to my brother, who sent it to me. (Pr. Cl; who and he).
(d) They should pardon my son, who has never committed such a fault before – (Adv. Cl. of reason who because he). (e) Envoys were sent, who should sue for peace
Envoys were sent, that might sue for peace. (Adv. Cl. of purpose)

Which-clauses

(a) I know which way I should take. (N.CI.)
(b) The book which you gave me is lost. (Adj. CI.)
(c) He hanged all the priisoners, which was a very bar- barous act. (Pr. Cl. which and it).
(d) I cannot solve this sum which is so difficult. (Adv. Cl. of reason; which = because it).

When – clauses

(a) Do you know when he was born? (N.Cl.)
(b) Do you know the time when he was born? (Adj. Col.)
(c) Come to me at 5 p.m. when I shall accompany you to the beach. (Pr. Cl. when = and then).
(d) I was here when he came. (Adv. Cl. of time). Where-clauses
(a) I know where he was born? (N.CL.)
(b) I know the place where he was born? (Adj. Cl.)
(c) On 24th January, we reached Calcutta, where we stayed a fortnight. (Pr. Cl. where = and there).
(d) I live where he lives. (Adc. Cl. of place)

That-clauses

(a) He said that he was going. (N.CI.)
(b) This is the boy that I spoke of. (Adj. Cl.)
(c)(a) He spoke in such a low voice that few could hear him. (Adv. Cl. of result)
(b) He is so poor that he cannot pay his school fees. (Adv. Cl. of extent or degree).
(c) He works hard that he may succeed. (Adv. Cl. of purpose).
(d) He is pround that he is rich (Adv. Cl. of reason). If-clause

6. (a) I doubt if he passed the examination. (N.CL.) (b) (a) If he is in Madras, I shall see him (Adv. Cl. of Condition).
(b) If the English paid ship money (although it is true that they paid ship-money), they did it under protest. (Adv. Cl. of concession)

Why-clause

7. (a) I know why he has come back. (N.CL.)
(b) I know the reason why he has come back. (Adj. Cl.)

But-clauses

8 (a) He is intelligent, but the problem is too hard for him. (Pr. Cl.)
(b) There is no rose but has a thorn. (Adj. Cl.) (but = that not–There is no rose that has not a thorn)
(c-1) (a) It never rains but it pours. (Adv. Cl. of condition; but = unless – It never rains unless it pours) (= it never rains without pouring). There is nothing good or bad but (unless) thinking makes it so
(b) The boy stood on the burning deck whence all but he had fled (even if he did not flee)
(c) I would have gone but that you forbade me (Adj. Cl. of condition; but that if not).
(d) Perdition catch my soul, but I love thee (Adv. Cl. of condition; but if not).
(c-2) (i) He is not such a fool but he can tell that (Adv. Cl. of result; but that not)
(b) Inever go there but I see him.
(Adv. Cl. of result; but when not).
(d) (a) Never fear but I will go. (N. Cl. ; but that- not =Never fear that I will not go)
(b) It cannot be but Nature hath some Director of infinite power. (N. Cl. but that not. It is impossible that Nature has not a Director of Infinite power.

Note 1. In the above sentences it gives emphasis to the noun or pronoun following; and for that purpose, the simple sentence is turned into a complex one; for instance sentence is merely a very emphatic form of saying ‘I want Rama’ — Rama and nobody else.
Note:- 2. In sentence 1 to 6 it =the person(s), while in sentences 7 and 8, it – the thing (s).
Note:-3. The subordinate clauses in the above eight sentences, may be construed as Adjective clauses qualifying the pronoun it.
Note:-4. From the above eight sentences, it is seen that it is used as an antecedent to relatives of either number and any gender and any person.

So the antecedent of the relative pronouns in all the sentences is it, but the verb in the adjective clause agrees (both number and person) with the pronoun before the relative, but not with the antecedent (b) as it generally should; otherwise, ‘I who say’ in sentence (5) and, “They who is’ in sentence (6) sound monstrous.
Note:- 5. In such sentences as:-
(1) Is this a dagger which I see before me?
(2). Is that a knife that he has in his hand?

The adjective clause qualifies this in sentence (1), and that in sentence (2).
B-1. It is rarely that I meet him.
2. It was here that it happened.
3. It was on this condition that I went.
4. It is with this temper that I consider this affair.
N. B.:- At first sight, these sentences appear to be of the form of those sentences containing a formal subject like: ‘It is right that you should come; which is the more usual way of saying “That you should come is right’, but the above sentences in (B) will not bear this inversion; for instance, sentence (1) becomes ‘That I meet him is rarely’, which is nonsense.
In those, four sentences in (B) that is a conjunction so these sentences seem to defy grammatical analysis but the that clauses may be construed as Noun clauses used adverbially to adverb(rarely, here) and adverb equivalents (on this condi- tion, with this temper).
Note:-6. (a) It was twelve O’ clock when I reached this place. (Adv. Cl. of time, modidfying was).
(b) It was yesterday that he repaid the loan, (Noun. Cl. used adverbially to the adverb, yesterday).
(c) I rember the day that he repaid the loan. (Ad. Cl. qualifying the noun, day) Here that (=on which) is an adverbial accusative.

Ex. 40 G.
Analyse into clauses and give their Construction:-
Example: When he reached the cottage door Krishna who had gone out to attend a fair, was grieved to find that his absence had made his mother so ill that she was almost dying.
clause.
Ans: 1. Krishna was grieved to find: — Prinicipal
2. When he reached the cottage door :- Adverb clause of time modifying the verb, was grieved.
3. Who had gone out to attend a fair:– Adjective clause qualifying the noun, Krishna.
4. That his absence had made his mother so ill:-Noun clause, object to the infinitive, to find.
5. That she was almost dying:- Adverb clause of result modifying the adverb, so.
This is a Complex sentence containg four-Subordinate clauses.
(a) – 1. He thinks he is still a young man and will eve to eat the fruit of the tree he is planting.
2. When the pigeons heard this advice, they did as their king told them.
3. When he saw it, he could not make out what it was and why it was put there.
4. A little while after the workmen had left the place, a herd of monkeys, who lived in the trees close by came down to see what was being done.
5. That is the reason, why every bat who has lived since then, is afraid to come out of his den until he knows by the darkness deep that the birds and beasts are all gone to sleep.
6. When he went into the fields next morning, he met the fox, who told him to go straight on till he came to a castle.
7. The prince looked so young, that the King of the country said he would spare his life, if he would bring him the golden horse, which could run quicker than the wind.
8. Next morning the King said that if the price could bring him a lovely princess, who lived in a golden castle, he would spare his life.
9. The moment the prince entered the room in which the King and Queen were sitting, every one in the castle awoke, and the prince was again made prisoner.
10. The bales of cotton which are pressed into small space, are then taken to the factories or mills, where the cotton is spun into yarn or thread.
11. The birds that come to the tree under which I live tell me that you are good and wise, and know everything.

Ans. :-(a)-5-(a) That is the reasnon Pr. Cl. (b) why every bat is afraid… den… Adj. Cl. qualifying reason (c) Who has… then… Adj. Cl. qualifying bat. (d) Until he knows… deep… Adj. Cl. of time modifying is afraid. (e) That the birds… sleep … N. Cl. Object of knows.

(a)-8-(a) Next morning the king said -Pr. Cl. (b) That he would spare his life -N. Cl. object of said. (c) if the prince could-princess-Adv. Cl. of condition, modifying would spare. (d) Who lived… castle — Adj. Cl. qualifying princess.

(b) 1. With the quick insight which every child in Holland has, the boy perceived at once that the water must soon enlarge the hole, through which it was now only dropping and that the whole country would be flooded and ruined.

2. He knew that, if he removed the small slender finger, which he had opposed to the escape of the water, he himself and the whole village, would perish.

3. Certain it is that at day-break he was found in the same painful position by a clergyman; who as he advanced thought he heard groans, and bending over the dyke, discovered that the child was writhing with pain.

4. Uberto was seized as a ‘traitor’, and the nobles thought they used him very gently, when only decreed that he should be banished for ever from Genoa and deprived of all his property.

5. He asked what ransom was expected for the youth, and learned that he was belived to be a person of importance, -not less than two thousand crowns would be taken.

6. The son of a vile mechanic, who told you that one day you might repent the scorn with which you treated him has the satifaction of seeing his prediction accomplished.

7. This Dionysius refused, unless some person could be found who would consent to suffer death in his stead, if he did not perform his promise.

8. If you attain this object, you may serve your friends in Greece so that, when they see you they will look at you as a wonder, as was the case with Themistocles.

9. When the captain saw this, he sent some of the most beautiful things he had, to the king of the country who was so much pleased, that he sent for the captain to come to his palace.

10. When Napoleon Bonaparte invaded Italy the second time, he led his army across the cold stormy Alps, where the snow lies deep all the year round, and the roads are often blocked up by masses of ice.

11. Never was the old saying that a dutiful father had dutiful children better exemplified than in Sir Thomas More’s family.

12. My friends’s talk made so bold an impression on my mind, that soon after I was abed, I fell insensibly into a most unaccountable reverie that had neither moral nor design in it and cannot be so properly called a dream as a delirium.

13. When contrary to the wicked hopes he had formed, his brother proved victorious his envy and malice knew no bounds, and he swore he would burn the chamber where Orlando slept.

14. I once put a wasp into the nest, but when the spider came out in order to seize it as usual, upon perceiving what kind of enemy it had to deal with it instantly broke all the bands that had held it fast and contributed all that lay in its power to disengage so formidable an antagonist.

15. When the ship fell and the mast became nearly horizontal, he crawled out to the mizzen-top, and sat there till the spar gave way and plunged him into the waves, whence he was dragged into one of the boats half-drawned but grasping tight his precious trust.

16. Nor is there in the whole range of nature a grandeur or more magnificent scene than is the ocean in a storm, when deep calls unto deep, and its liquid mountains roll and break against each other, when it dashes to pieces, in the wantonness of its power, the strongest structures which man can rear for the purpose of floating over its billows, than it is that the proudest and bravest tremble and quail at the roaring and thunder of the waves.

17. When such a man perceives that if he fails, every one will be able to understand the risk that has been incurred, but that if he succeeds, no one will estimate the danger that has been silently overcome, he bows nevertheless to the supreme dictates of his judgement, regardless alike of the honours of his own age and the praise of posterity.

Ans–(b) 1-(a) With the quick insight, the boy perceived at once–Pr. Cl. (b) which every child in Holland has — Adj. Cl. qualifying insight. (c) That the water hole… N. Cl. object of of perceived. (d) That the whole country… ruined… (N. Cl. Co. ordinate to ill (e) Through which it droppin Adj. Cl. qualifying hole.

3.(a) Certain it is — Pr. Cl. (b) That at day-break he… clergyman – N. Cl. put in apposition to it. (c) Who thought- -Adj. Cl. qualifying clergyman. (d) As he advanced – Adv. Cl. of time modifying thought. (e) (That) he heard groans. N. Cl. object of thought. (f) (who) bending over the dyke discovered -Ad. Cl. qualifying clergyman. (g) that the child was writhing with pain – N. Cl. object of discovered.

13. (a) His envy and malice knew no bounds — Pr. Cl. (b) When contrary to the wicked hopes his brother proved victorious Adv. Cl. of time, modifying knew. (c) That he had formed — Adj. Cl. qualifying hopes. (d) He swore – Pr. Cl. (e) (That) he would burn the chamber –N. Cl. object of swore. (f) Where Orlando slept -Adj. Cl. qualifying chamber.

14. (a) I once put nest-Pr. CL. (b) But upon perceiving what kind of enemy; it instantly broke all the bands –Pr. Cl. (c) But upon… enemy; it contributed all. –Pr. Cl. (d) When the spider came out seize it– Adv. Cl. of time, modifying broke and contributed. (e) As (it was) usual — Adv. Cl. of manner; modifying came. (f) (That) it had to deal with — Adj. Cl. qualifying enemy. (g) That had held it fast – Adj. Cl. qualifying bands. (h) That lay in its power to disengage so formidable an antagonist – Adj. Cl. qualifying all. (i) As the wasp (formidable) –Adv. Cl. of degree modifying so.

16. (a) Nor is … scene – Pr. Cl. (b) Than is the ocean (grand and magnificient) in a storm)- Adv. Cl. of comparison modifying grandeur and more magnificent. (b) When deep calls unto deep-Adv. Cl. of time modifying is in. (b). (d) (When) its liquid mountains roll — Co. ordinate to c. (e) (When) its liquid mountains break against each other — Co. ordinate to (iii). (f) When it (ocean) dashes to pieces in the wantonness of its power the strongest structures Co-ordinate to c. (g) Which man can… billows – Adj.Cl. qualifying structures. (i) Then it is – Pr. Cl. (j) That the proudest and bravest tremble at the roaring… waves-C. used adverbially to the adverb then (k) (That the proudest and bravest) quail at the roaring… vaves – Coordinate to l.

17. (a) He bows nevertheless… posterity — Pr. Cl. (b) When such a man perceives — ADv. Cl. of time, modifying bows. (c) that every one will be able to understand the risk- -N. Cl. object of perceives. (d) If he fail Adv. Cl. of condition, modifying will be able to understand. (e) That has been incurred — Adj. Cl. qualifying risk. (f) That no one will estimate the danger Co-ordinate to iii. (h) That has been silently over- come– Adj. Cl. qualifying danger. (i) If he succeeds — Adv. Cl. of condition, modifying will estimate

Prepositions : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

Prepositions

To prepositions, the language owes much of its flexibility, so that a person’s command of English may be judged by the way in which he use the prepositions and “They are the spice’ as John O’ London remarks.
1. ఒక Noun కు Pronoun కు గాని ముందుంచబడి, అవి తెలియచేయు వస్తువులకును ఇతర వస్తువులకును గల సంబంధము తెలుపు మాటలు Prepo- sitions అనబడును.
Ex: The book is on the table.
ఒక Preposition కు తరువాత వచ్చు noun గాని pronoun గాని ఎప్పుడును Objective case లో నుండును. అప్పుడది ఆ Preposition చేత govern చేయబడునని గాని లేక ఆ preposition కి Object అని గాని చెప్పుదురు.
2. రెండు గాని, అంతకంటే ఎక్కువ మాటలుగాని చేరి ఒక Preposi tion యొక్క పనిని నెరవేర్చున యెడల అవి Phrase-Preposition or Prepositional Phrase ad. On account of, instead of in spite of, with respect to.
Swift says “I write Gulliver’s Travels with a view to informing and instructing mankind but withut my view to profit or praise”.
3. verbs, nouns, adjectives and participles o కొన్ని ప్రత్యేకమైన prepositions విధాయకముగా వచ్చును. వాటిని Appropriate Prepositions అందురు.
da: (a) listen to, depend upon; (b) affection for; limit to; (c) fond of, affectionate to, (d) astonished at, born to. Intransitive verbs a Preposition 530 Transitive verbs అగును. అప్పుడు ఆ Prepositions ను విడిగా phrase చేయకూడదు. He laughed at me. I looked at the sky.
4. Use of phrases: (a) in view of (b) with a view to (c) with the view of the above three phrases are each equivalent to a preposition and each is liable to be confused in meaning or in form with the others.

Prepositions Definition And Types With Examples In Telugu

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

PhraseMeaningUseExample
(a) In view of view=sightTaking into account [ex- ternal circumstances that exist now in the present]+ nounIn view of the state of the ground, the match will not be played to-day.
(b) (1) with a view to (2) without any view to (view eye)Calculating upon [a desired re- sult in future]+ noun gerund(a) With a view to [the increase t of increasing agricultural out-put special powers are granted to the D.P.W.  (b) Swift says: I write Gulliver’s Travels with a view to informing and instructing man- kind, but without any view to profit or praise.
(c) With the view of (view-purpose)intending to do(in future) a thing in one’s competence.+gerundwith the view of building a house he has bought land.

When the verb cannot be used as noun [or has no noun fom] there is only one use of the phrase government issued gold bonds on liberal terms. (b) i.e. with the gerund of the verb; e.g.-With a view to overcoming foreign exchange difficulty, the
Note: (1) The variant of the phrase (b), with the infinitive (with a view to increase) is not only vulgar and unidiomatic but ungrmmatical in as much as the phrase, being equivalent to a preposition, should not be followed by the verb form (to increase).

Prepositions denoting (a) Point of time and
(b) Period of time.
(1) Study the following sentences :
(1) You must be back by four ‘O’ clock.
(2) I have been ill since yesterday.
(3) He will take the medicine from the first of January.
(4) 1 shall return before Friday next.
(5) The school has been closed since May.
(6) His health has been bad since 1950.పై వాక్యములలో Four o’ clock, yesterday, First of January, Friday next, May, 1950 అనునవి ఒక పని ఎప్పటి నుండి ప్రారంభించునో లేక ఎప్పటిలోపున ముగించునో నిర్ణయించుచున్నవి. కాబట్టి ఇట్టి మాటలు Point of time ను తెలియజేయును.

(2) Study the following sentences:
(1) I shall be back in an hour.
(2) Istayed there for a day.
(3) I shall finish the work within four days.
(4) I have been here for the last one month.
(5) I have been studying English for two years.
(6) 1 have not heard from you for a long time.
పై వాక్యములలో An hour, A day, Four days, One month, Two years, A long time అనునవి ఒక పని యెంతకాలము జరిగినది లేక జరుగుచున్నదో, అనగా ఆ పనియొక్క అవధిని లేక పరిమాణము (Duration of action) ను సూచించుచున్నవి. కాబట్టి ఇట్టి మాటలు Period of time ను తెలియజేయును.

Note : 1. Point of time ను తెలియజేయు మాటల ముందు ఉపయోగింపబడిన Prepositions ఏవి? By, since, from, before, ఈ Prepositions ను point of time ముందేకాని period of time ముందుపయోగింప
కూడదు.
Note : 2. Period of time ను తెలియజేయు మాటల ముందు వుపయోగింపబడిన Prepositions ఏవి? In, within, for, కాబట్టి ఈ Prepositions Period of time wods Point of time
ముందుపయోగింపకూడదు.

Special uses of Prepositions

1. In-at : పెద్ద స్థలముల విషయములలో In, చిన్న స్థలముల విషయములలో at ఉపయోగింపబడును.
ఉదా : (1) He lives in Calcutta. (2) He is now in England. (3) The party stopped at an inn. (4) He was born at a small village in Mysore. (5) The English won the battle fought at Plassey in Bengal.
At, point of time ను సూచించును. in, period of time ను సూచించును.
ఉదా: He will start at sixo’ clock in the evening. He will start in a month.
2. In, within : ఈ రెండు కూడ, period of time ముందుపయోగింపబడును. In an hour అనగా ఒక గంట అగుపరికి within an Thour అనగా ఒక గంట లోపుగా.
hour).
ఉదా: You must return in an hour at the end of an hour) You must return within an hour (before the end of an
Note: This work must be done within four o’clock తప్పు; ఏలన four o’ clock అనునది point of time కాబట్టి This work must be done by (or before) four o’ clock అనవలెను.
3. After, in : ఈ రెండును కూడ period of time ను సూచించును. కాని period of time భూతకాలమునకు చెందునపుడు after వాడవలెను. భవిష్యత్కాలమునకు చెందునపుడు in వాడవలెను.
ఉదా: He started work after a few days. He will start the work in a few days.
N.B.: After భవిష్యత్కాలము విషయములో ఉపయోగింపబడకూడదు. ఉదా : He will start the work after a few days అనుట తప్పు.
4. From, since ఇవి రెండును కూడ point of time సూచించును. అర్థభేదము కూడ లేదు, కాని ప్రయోగమునందు మాత్రము భేదము కలదు.
Since ఉపయోగించునపుడు verb Present perfect tense లో గాని, Present perfect continuous tense లో గాని వుండవలెను. కాని from ఉన్న వాక్యములో verb ఏ tense లో నైనను ఉండవచ్చును.

SinceFrom
PresentI have beenI shall attendfuture
Perfectill sinceschool from
oryesterdayto-morrow.
PresentI have beenI attend schoolpresent
Perfectsuffering fromfrom to-day
Continuouspain sinceI attend schoolpast
Mondayfrom Wednesday to Sunday

Note 1. ‘I have been ill from yesterday’ y ‘I have been lame from my childhood అనవచ్చును.”
Note 2. ‘I have been unwell since three weeks’ e తప్పు; ఏలన, “Three weeks’ అనునది period of time కాబట్టి ‘I have been unwell for three weeks’ అనవలెను.
V. For, before: 536 for, period of time; before point of time మ సూచించును.
From a verb, past tence verb చే సూచింపబడు పని యొక్క ఆది, అంతములు చెప్పవలెను. of time ను సూచించును.

ForBefore
1. I have lived in Calcutta for ten years.Rama will rise before six o’ clock.
2. I lived in Calcutta for ten years.Govind will not rise before five o’clock.

Note 1. ‘I am suffering from pain from four dayss is a very common mistake; it should be: I have been suffering from pain for four day
Note:2. Theschoolwillnotoperyora week’s Theschool willnotopen in (or within) a week’ అనుట తప్పు; ఏలన? అట్టి negativesentence లో for మాత్రమే ఉపయోగింపవలయును.
VI. By, with : కర్త (ఒక పనిని చేయువాడు) విషయములో oy యును, ఒకపని చేయుట కుపయోగపడు సాధనము (instrument) విషయములో.. with ను ఉపయోగింపనగును.
A: The boar was slain by him with a dagger.

Ex. 35 I.
Insert correct Prepositions in the places left blank:-

1. The field was ploughed up.. ….a peasant….a pair of oxen. 2. The work must be done…. twelve O’clock. 3. You must be back…. a week. 4. No one has seen him…. Wednes- day last. 5. He cannot get home…. sunset. 6. I shall be ready to start….two or three days. 7. Take care to be back midday. 3. I shall not be back…. the end of the week. 9. He has been absent from home…. Friday last, and I do not think he will return…. the 30th of next month. 10. Let me see you again… ..an hour’s time. 11. I have been having fever…. ten days. 12. I shall have completed my task…. to-morrow evening. 13. The train will start…. forty minutes from now. 14. I have lived. …Allahabad…. Ist March. 15. i was born…. Rome-Italy. 16. The city motor service will not be opened…. a year. 17. He succeeded in his attempt…. four years. 18. I received the message….eight O’clock…. the morning. 19. I saw him felling a tree…. an axe. 20. The portrait was painted….a famous artist who lived…. the seventeenth century. 21. He will start his business…. to-morrow. 22. You must finish your work…. three O’clock this evening. 23. My friend cannot get up….7 O’clock.

Ans: 1. by; with 2. by 3. in 4. since 5. before 10. in 11. for 12. by 13. in 15. at; in 16. for 17. after 21. from 22. before (or by).

Ex. 35 J
Correct the following by correcting the prepositions :-

1. I have not seen him since three days. 2. I was born at New York. 3. Rama must be here within noon. 4. I shall be ready to go after two hours. 5. You will not see me again before a month. 6. I have had nothing to eat long since. 7. He has been absent from last Tuesday. 8. I shall have finished this business within to-morrow evening. 9. I have lived at Rome since a year. 10. Govind has been absent since four months and will come back after a fortnight. 11. The train will not start before ten minutes. 12. Come to my house after an hour. 13. I have been a clerk in this office since five years. 14. You have not visited me long since. 15. He was kicked with his horse. 16. He spent four months at Bengal. 17. He lives at London. 18. I have not seen him from a long time. 19. I have cut it by a knife. 20. Is Ceylon in the south or west of India? 21. I send you this letter with Govind.

Ans: 1. for 2. in 3. by or before 4. in 5. for 6. for two days 7. since 8. by 9. for 10. for; in 11. in 16. in 19. with 20. to 21. per.

Appropriate Prepositions

Absent from school.
(Be) Accompanied by a person; with a thing.
Accuse a person of a crime.
(Be) Accustomed to riding.
Adjacent to a field.
Affection for a person or a thing.
Affectionate to a person or children.
Afraid of death, punishment or animal.
Agree to a proposal; with a person; on conditions; among themselves.
Aim at a thing.

(Be) Alarmed at the sight.
Alight from a horse or a carriage on the ground, at the gate.
Amount to a hundred (come to)
Angry with a person; at a thing.
Apologise to a person(beg-pardon)
Appeal to a person or one’s feelings for redress or help.
Apply to a person, for a thing; to a thing. (e.g. the remark
applies to the present case; Apply for leave).
Arrive at a place or conclusion; in a country.
Ask a person for a thing; a thing of a person.

(Be) Ashamed of misconduct.
(Be) Astonished at the news or conduct.
Attacked by a person, with disease.
Attend to one’s work (do): to a teacher (listento): on or upon. masters or sick persons (wait on or be ready to serve).
N.B.:- Attend school, meeting, or office; church or lectures, etc. Attentive to a teacher.
Avenge (oneself) on a person (wreak vengeance).
N.B.: Avenge an insult or wrong (inflict retribution. e.g. Soorpanaka tried to avenge the wrong done to her by Rama). Bark at a thief.
Bear a grudge against a person for somthing. Beg (a thing) of person (a person) for a thing. Believe in
(1) God, ghosts (have faith in the existence of)
(2) One’s honesty (have faith in)
(3) Oil engines (have faith in the efficacy of)
(4) Pampering servants (have faith in the advisability of)
N.B. Believe a man (i.e. what he says)
Belong to a person.

(Be) Bent on doing a thing = Intent on doing a thing.
Bestow (a thing) upon a person (confer).
Beware of thieves, dogs, mistakes, dangers. etc.

(Be) Blind of one eye;to one’s own faults, or to consequences (not to see or notice).
Boast of learning, riches, strength (be proud of).
Born to sorrows; with a silver spoon in mouth: under a lucky star.
Bound for a place (going to, intending to go to e.g. The ship was bound for London).
Call at a person’s house (go there). The occasion calls for quick action: for explanation.
Call forth all (one’s) energy.
Call on or upon a person (visit him at his house).
Call upon a person (require him to do something).
Call to a person (shout to)
Care for a person or thing (attach value to)
Carry on business (continue out an order, proposal, plan
(execute it); off (remove)
Caution against danger.

Charge a person with a crime.
Cheat a man of his money. Clear off debt (discharge).
Come about (take place).
Come across anyone (meet accidentally), a word, a passage, a
thing (meet with)
Come by a thing (obtain)
Come of a respectable family.

(Be) Born of something. (result from)
Compare a thing to another (to show likeness); a thing with,
another (to show contrast).
Compete with a (person) for (a thing).
Complain of a person or thing; about a person or thing; to a person against or of another.
Comply with one’s request or wishes.
(Be) Composed of materials of which a thing is made.

(Be) concerned with a thing (have to do with), about a thing (feel uneasy or anxious); in an affair (had anything to do with).
Concur with a person.
Confident of success. Confined to bed, thing,
Congratulate a person on his success.
Consent to a thing; proposal
Consist of its parts; in (e.g. Greatness consists in pardoning one’s foe).
Consult with a person (to think together).

N.B.- Consult a person (seek his advice).
(Be) Content with one’s lot.
Correspond with a person (write letters); to something (agree with or be similar to).
Cure a person of a disease or a bad habit.
Deal with a person, subject (treat) with a person (have transac- tions with him).
Deal in rice, sugar (trade in)
Decide on or upon a plan.
Delighted with the offer; in doing good to others.
To (be) delivered of a child to (give birth to); deliver a (letter, a percel).
Depend on or upon one’s help.
Deprive a person of a thing.
Desirous of gain; desire for wealth
Despair of success.

Die of a disease, from other things (hunger, wound); by violence, the sword; in battle; for one’s country; in poverty (die a beggar)
Differ from or with a person (e.g. A person differs from or with another in opinion or on a subject. A thing differs from another (be unlike).
Difference between two things.
Distinguish one thing from another, between two things.
Divide a thing between two; among many.
Due to one’s negligence (owing to)
Duty to parents.
Endow (a school, a public hospital) with, (Be)-endowed with genius by nature.
Entrust a person with a thing; a thing to a person.
Envious of another’s success or prosperity or beauty.
Envy (n) at another’s success.

N.B. Women envy superior beauty.
Fail in an attempt.
Fail in love with a person.
Familiar with (A person is familiar with a thing); to (a thing is familiar to a person).
Feed on grass or other food;
a baby with milk, or a cow with grass.
Feel for a person in trouble (have pity for).
Fond of a fruit; reading novels, a person or thing.
Free from errors; cares; of charges interest.
Free a person from restraint.
Glad of one’s promotion, at the result.
Grateful to a person.
Greedy of gain; after riches.
Grieve at or for an event, a person.
Guard against, or from danger.
Happen to a person.

Ignorant of a fact.
Inform a person of a thing.
Inquire or Enquire into a matter; of a person;
about a matter; after a person.
Insist upon payment.
Intimate (adj.) with a person (familiar)
Intimate (verb) a fact to a person.
Judge of a person by his actions.
Lame of leg; in the right or left leg.
Lament for the dead.
Laugh at a person; for his folly.
Leave for a place (go to).
Listen to a person (hear attentively, obey) to what one says.
Live upon rice, vegetables (subsist): by begging or other means.
Look at a person, or thing.
Look after a person, thing or business (take care of).
Look for something lost (search).
Look to a thing or business.
Made of wood, clay, gold.
Meddle with a person or a person’s affairs or a thing (as a watch).
Mock at a person.
Mourn for a person that is dead.
Moved at the sight; to tears with pity; by entreaties or threats.
Need (n) for a thing; assistance; of caution.
(In) Need of help.
Necessary to happiness or success.
Necessity for his going.
Obedient to parents or teachers.

Object to a proposal.
(Be) Obliged to a person; for a favour.
Occur to one’s mind (strike or suggest itself).
Occur to a person (happen) part with money or a thing (give);
from a person (depart).
Partake of food.
Partial (adj.) to a friend.
Play at cricket; on the fiddle.
Prevent a person from coming or doing something.

N.B.:- Prevent a thing (e.g.) Rain prevented the match.
Prefer one thing to another.
Present a person with a thing.
Pride oneself upon something.
Prohibit a person from doing something.
Proud of a person, position, learning.
Provide for one’s children, oneself or family, against a coming evil or danger.
Provide a person with a thing; a thing for a person (furnish). N.B.:- Crops provide food.
Put up with one (stay with one); at a place (large); with a thing (endure).
Quarrel with a person; over a thing.
Recovr from illness.
Recover the price, etc. from a person.
Refer to a book or records.
Refer a matter to a person.
Relieve a person from pain or distress.

N.B. Relieve pain or poverty (lessen). Relieve a sentry (release from duty).
Rely on or upon a person or thing (depend on).
Remind a person of a thing (put him in mind of).
Repent of one’s past bad conduct.

N.B. Repent one’s hastiness or foolishness.
Reply to a letter or person.
Revenge oneself on a person for some injury.
Rid a place of dacoits (to get rid of); a troublesome thing.
Rob a person of a thing.
Rule over a country.

Search for or after something.
(In) Search of a thing (food etc.)
Seek for an employment or happiness; after honour, wealth etc.
Send for a person, a doctor (=require to be brought).
Shoot at a thing (bird, mark or animal)
Side with a person (go over to his side).
Sorry for the loss.
Stare at a person
Succeed to the throne; in an attempt.
Supply a person with a thing; a thing to a person.
Sure of success.

(Be) Surprised at a strange thing or news.
Sympathise with a person; another’s sorrow. Sympathy for the poor.
Thankful to a person for a favour.
Trust in a person; to a thing (man’s honesty).
Turn to a person for help.
Vexed at a thing, with a person.
Wait upon a person (attend as a servant); for a person (stay).
Want of money (absence of money).
Wanting in courage (lacking).
Warn a person of danger; against a fault.
Watch for an opportunity.
Wonder at a thing, news.
Worthy of praise.
Yield to an enemy (submit).

Ex. 36
1. Fill up the blanks with Prepositions :-

(a) 1. He is very kind…. me. 2. I write….a slate… . a pencil. 3. The tank is full…. water. 4. We cannot cross it. … foot. 5. The slate is…. the box. 6. He went…. his house. 7. Can you look…. the moon? 8. He sold his dog…. ten rupees. 9. He fell…. the river. 10. Wait…. the gate. 11. He is angry …. me. 12. Divide this…. six men. 13. Divide this…. A and B. 14. It is not fit…. use. 15. I am waiting…. my friend. 16. He died…. hunger. 17. The table is made…. wood. 18. The wall is built….stone. 19. Do not depend…. the help….others. 20. Do not depend….others….help. 21. He laughed…. me. 22. He was absent….school yesterday. 23. What are you afraid
.? 24. The boy is absent….leave. 25. The boy is….leave now. 26. I have been ill…. four days. 27. I have been ill…. yesterday. 28. He is accused…. theft. 29. He is charged…. theft. 30. The man is now…. danger. 31. He goes…. door. … door. 32. Give me a chair to sit….. 33. I have a ball to play ….. 34. I am going….a walk. 35. I am pleased…. you… your honesty. 36. He went…. Calcutta…. Madras. 37. He fell…. the horse.

Ans:- 4. on 11. with 12. among 13. between 16. of 19. upon; of 22. from 24. without 25. on 28. or 29. with 30. out of 31. from; to 32. on 35. with; about.

(b) 1. Do you agree proposal. 3. He was angry me? 2. They did not agree — my what you did. 4. You boast — your learning. 5. I beg–you this favour. 6. He did not comply — myrequest. 7. I quite sympathise you. 8. I feel no sympathy— him. 9. He was moved —pity. 10. He was moved — tears. 11. The king fell-love—the princess. 12. He is blind — one eye. 13. He is blind — his own faults. 14. You are fond —play. 15. He is-search-food. 16. I am not aware — this 17. She is delivered — a male child. 18. I supplied him–good rice. 19. He is intent his studies. 20. I prefer walking — running. 21. The crops failed- -want- rain. 22. He entrusted the work -me. 23. He entrusted me — provided food — him. 25. I provided him–
— the work. 24. 1 food. 26. On his way home he called my house. 27. You may call — me in the evening. 28. God has endowed man— reason. 29. The passage is free errors. 30. I informed you the fact. 31. Brahmins live-rice and vegetables. 32. He reminded me–my promise. 33. He put me — mind my promise. 34. I insisted— his going. 35. a Ford, he has an ambassador car. 36. Do not cry — spilt milk. 37. He died his country. 38. The business was set foot. 39. He set the house-fire. 40. I am astonished — – the news. 41. The lake abounds — fish. 42. He is proficient – –mathematics. 43. He proved false— his friend. 44. She gave birth a male child. 45. The teacher punished the boy his mischief. 46. He set out walk. 47. Oh God! keep me —: 48. I am grateful you the help you rendered me. 49. The boys are clamouring – a holiday. 50. It is 9 O’clock watch.

Ans: 1. with 2. to 3. at 4. of 5. of 6. with 7. with 8. for 9. with 10. to 11. in ….with 12. of 13. to 15. in of 16. of 17. of 18. with 19. on 20 to 21. for… of 22. to 23. with 24. for 25. with 26. at 27. on 28. with 29. from 30. of 31. on 32. of 33. in…of 34. on 35. besides 36. over 38. on 41. in 45. for 47. from 49. for 50. by.

2. Correct the following:-
1. He is angry upon me.
2. You are very kind on me.
3. Be polite on him.
4. I depend your help.
5. He does not listen my advice.
6. Look the book on the table.
7. I am pleased for him.
8. He attends upon his lessons.
9. I am suffering by pain.
10. He has been ill from four days.
11. She is afraid by a dog.
12. Chairs are made with wood.
13. I must listen what you say.
14. All along I travelled on road.
15. He attends to school regularly.
16. The proposal was agreed by them.
17. He was surprised by the news.
18. He ordered to me to finish the work soon.
19. People travel on sea.
20. Such behaviour is not worthy to you.
21. We are accustomed with these inconveniences.
22. He at once applied to the post.
23. He cheated me five rupees.
24. He robbed my property.
25. My request was not complied to.
26. These things are quite familiar with me.
27.. This cloth is different to that.
28. He ordered for ten books.

Ans: 1. angry with 2. to 3. to 4. depend upon 5. listen. to 6. look at 7. pleased with 8. attends to 9. suffering from 10. for 11. afraid of 12. made of 13. travelled by 15. attends school 16. agreed to by them 17. surprised at 18. ordered me 20. worthy of 21. are accustomed to 22. applied for 23. cheated me of 24. robbed me of my property 25. complied with 26. to 27. different from 29. ordered ten books.

Note the following Exceptions:-
That e Relative Pronoun, & Preposi- tion చేత govern చేయబడినపుడు ఆ Preposition వాక్యమునకు చివర రావలెను. కాని that నకు ముందు రాకూడదు. ఉదా : The house in that I live అనకూడదు. The house that I live in అవవలెను. That ఉన్న వాక్యములో Preposition ను చివరకు తీసికొని రావలెను. అట్లు తీసుకొనివచ్చినపుడు, that ను లోపింపజేయవచ్చును. ఉదా :- “The house I live in.’ The man that you spoke of becomes “The man you
spoke of.
or that
2. Whom, which or that 355 Preposition 3 govern చేయబడినపుడు Preposition వానికి ముందు గాని, వాక్యమునకు చివరగాని 3. 1. This is the house in which I live. 2. That is the man whom we were looking for. 3. Which of the chairs did you sit on? 4. What is this the result of?

 

Conversion Of Sentences : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

Phrases and Clauses

‘There is a green book on the table’ on the table’ అను మాటల సముదాయము (group of words) ‘బల్లమీద’ అను : అర్థమిచ్చు చున్నది. కాని పూర్తి అయిన అర్థమిచ్చుట లేదు. మరియు ఆ సము దాయము (on the table) లో subject గాని, finite verb గాని లేదు. ఇట్టి అర్థవంతమైన మాటల సముదాయమును phrase అందురు. ఉ

Def.: A phrase is a group of words equivalent to a single part of speech and not having a subject and a predicate of its own. In the sentence ‘I saw a boy, who was carrying a basket of flowers’ ‘a basket of flowers’ is a phrase; ‘who was carrying a basket of flowers’ and ‘I saw a boy’ are clauses.

Conversion Of Sentences Definition And Types With Examples In Telugu

Kinds of Phrases

Phrases are of three kinds .. (1) A phrase that does the work of noun is called a Noun phrase; as: A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush. (2) A phrase that does the work of an adjective is called an Adjectival Phrase; as:- The house on the hill is mine. (3) A phrase that does the work of an adverb is called an Adverbial Phrase; as:- I will come in the evening.

Note: Preposition తో నారంభించు Phrase, దాని ప్రయోగమును బట్టి Adjective phrase గాని, Adverb Phrase గాని కావచ్చును. ఉదా: The house on the hill is mine. (Adj. phrase). I built a house on the hill. (adv. phrase).

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

Conversion Of Sentences

N.B.: All the examples given in this chapter may with advantage be made to serve to illustrate the conversion of one kind of sentence into another and vice versa. It is only then that the fullest benefit is derived by the pupils for acquiring mastery over the language.

From Simple to Complex
1. A simple sentence may be converted or changed into a Complex sentence by expanding some word or phrase into a Subordinate clause.
This Subordinate clause may be a Noun clause, an Ad- jective clause or an Adverb clause.

Noun Clauses

Study the following:- A

SimpleComplex
1. Do you know the owner of this house?Do you know who owns this this house?
2. I asked him his nameI asked him what his name was?
3. Can you tell me the date of his birth?Can you tell me when he was was born?
4. Do you know the place of his birth?Do you know where he was born?
5 He would not explain the reason of his absence He would not explain why he reason was absent
6 He does not know the method of working the sum.He does not know how the sum is to be worked.
7. I enquired his state of health.I enquired how his health was.
8. He does not know how to He does not know how he do it.He does not know how he should do it.

 

B

SimpleComplex
1. He admitted his guilt.He admitted that he was guilty.
2. His success is doubtful.It is doubtful whether he will succeed.
3. He is hopeful of his success.He is hopeful that he will succeed.
4. There can be no doubt of his success.There can be no doubt that he will succed
5. I was informed of his arrival.I was informed that he had arrived.
6. I believed in his honesty.I believed that he was honest.
7. The roundness of the earth is learly proved.That the earth is round is clearly proved.
8. We decided on his going.We decided that he should go.
9. The question of his pro- motion is under conside- ration.The question whether he should be promoted or not is under consideration.

 

C

His failure was due to his laziness.It was due to his laziness that he failed.

Note: Phrases are generally converted into clauses by changing the noun or pronoun in the possessive into the subject and the noun or gerund into the predicate.

D

SimpleComplex
1. They are known to be honest.It is known that they are honest.
2. They are known to have been honest.It is known that they were honest.
3. It is not safe for you to live alone.It is not safe that you should live alone.
4. The High School at Arcot owes its existence to Mr. Abdul Hakim.It is owing to Mr. Abdul Hakim that the High School at Arcot exists.
5. He may (must) have lost his way.It may (must) be that he lost his way.

E

SimpleComplex
1. I consider him to be honest.I consider that he is honest.
2. What do you want me me to do?What is it that you want me to do?
3. I am sorry to have given you so much trouble.I am sorry that I have given you so much trouble.

F

SimpleComplex
He will certainly pass the examinationIt is certain that he will pass the examination.

Note: The adverb is changed into the principal clause beginning with it.

A
SimpleComplex
1. Diligent students win prizes.Students who are diligent win prizes.
2. A burnt child dreads the fire.A child that burnt itself (= its fingers) dreads the fire.
3. The evil done by men lives after them.The evil that is done by men (or that men do) lives after them.
B
A drowning man catches at a straw.A man who is drowning catches at a straw.
C
The man in the boat was shouting.The man who was in the boat was shouting.
D
Abraham Lincoln was the first American to oppose slavery.Abraham Lincoln was the first American who opposed slavery.
E
We shall imitate the great qualities of our fore-fathers.We shall imitate the great qualities that our fore-fathers possessed.
F
Rama, the son of Dasaratha ruled over Ayodhya.Rama, who was the son of Dasaratha, ruled over Ayodhya.
G
I will fulfil my promise.I will fulfil what I have prom- ised or I will fulfil the promise (that) I have made.

 

Adverb Clauses

SimpleComplex
1. a) He failed in spite of his industry.He failed though he was industrious.
b) With all his learning he is the simplest of men.Though he is a man of great learning, he is the simplest of men.
c) For all his wealth he is is not contentedThough he is a wealthy man, he is not contented.
2. He built his house at the junction of two roads.He built his house where two roads met.
3. I punished him for impertinence.I punished him because+ he was impertinent.
4. We finished the work before his departure.We finished the work before he departed.
5. I have not seen him since his arrival.I have not seen him since he arrived.
6. He did according to instructions.He did as he was instructed (told).
7. But for the timely arrival of the police, he would have been killed.Had not the police arrived in time, he would have been killed = If the pilice had not arrived in time, he would have been killed.
8. In case of (or in the event of) his coming here, I shall surely meet him.If he comes here
9. I cannot do this without your help.I shall surely meet him.
10. On hearing the news, he fainted.I cannot do this unless you help me.
11. I was healthy during my stay there.When he heard the news he fainted.
12. Dinner being over, we slept.I was healthy while I stayed there.
13. Immediately after (soon after) our arrival we went to bed.When dinner was over, we slept.
14. Being innocent, the prisoner was released.As soon as we arrived, we went to bed.
15. With your permissionAs the prisoner was innocent, he was released.
I shall do the lesson again.If you permit me, I shall do the lesson again.
16. To speak the truth, I have not yet taken my meal. If I should speak the truth, I have not yet taken my meal.
17 This being granted the rest is easy.If this is granted, the rest is easy.
18. He could not attend school because of + his illness.He could not attend school because he was ill.
19. Notwithstanding the heat of the sun we must go out.Though the sun is hot, we must go out.
20. This book is certainly good, having been written by an eminent author..This book is certainly good, as it has been written by an eminent author.
21. Some were thrown into prison, others being exiled from the country.Some were thrown into prison, while others were exiled from the country.
22. They congratulated themselves on their success.They congratulated them- selves that they had succeeded.
23. The orator spoke with incomparable fluency.The orator spoke so fluently that nobody else could be com pared with him.
24. He seemed to speak with unusual earnestness.He seemed to speak with more earnestness than was usual with him.
25. I will work diligently so as to stand first in the class.I will work diligently that I may stand first in the class.
26. I am sorry for having hurt his feelings.I am sorry that I hurt his feelings.
27. His desire is in propor- tion to his riches.The more he has (or The richer he is) the more he desires.
28. His liking for her is inversely proportional to the length of time of his looking at her.The more he looked at her, the less he liked her.

 

SimpleComplex
1. In the event of his being late he will be punished.If he comes late, he will l be punished.
2. I will come weather permitting.I will come if weather permits.
3. Taking everything into consideration our lot is not a happy one.If one takes everything into consideration, (or if everything is taken into consideration) our lot is not a happy one.
4. Having rested for some- time we continued our journey.After we (had) rested for sometime, we continued our journey.
5. I having the start, my opponent was at a dis- advantage.As I had the start, my opponent was at a dis- advantage.
6. To the surprise of all, he was acquitted.He was acquitted, so that all were surprised.
7. To add to the confusion, the crowd rushed down the street.The crowd rushed down the street, so that they (or it) added to the confusion.
8. Who are you to find fault with me?Who are you that you should find fault with me?
9. We eat to live. We eat that we may live.
10. His boldness grew in proportion to his difficulties.The greater his difficulties (became), the bolder he grew.
11. He looks like a man possessed by a devil.He looks as if he were possessed by a devil.
12. The Assyrian came down like a wolf on a fold.The Assyrain came down as a wolf comes down on a fold.
13. I should have been a fool to do so.I should have been a fool if I had done so.
14. I should be sorry to lose this chance.I should be sorry if I were to lose this chance.

From Complex to Simple

A Complex sentence may be changed into a Simple sen- tence by contracting Subordinate clauses into phrases; as :-

SimpleComplex
1. It is said that the house is on fire.The house is said to be on fire.
2. This is a thing that occurs daily.This is a thing of daily occurrence.
3. When he opened the box, he found it empty.On opening the box, he found it empty.
4. After he arrived, he slept for an hour.Having arrived, he slept for an hour.
5. When the sun had set, he darened the land.Having set, the sun darkened the land.
6. When the sun had set, they stopped playing.The sun having set, they stopped playing.
7. When the day dawned, they all woke up.The day dawning, they all woke up.
8. The more they are, the merrier they will be.Their mirth will be in proportion to their num- ber.
9. I am sorry that I have given you much trouble.I am sorry to have given you much trouble.
10. It is reported that Krishna won the match.Krishna is reported to have won the match.
11. The teacher knew that the boy has passed.The teachr knew the boy to have passed (or) The boy was known to have passed.
12. I believe he is speaking the truth.He is believed to be speaking the truth.
13. He hopes that he can finish the work by tomorrow.He hopes to be able to finish the work by tomorrow.
14. Everyone expects she will win the prize.Everyone expects her to win the prize (or) She is expected (by everyone) to win the prize.
15. I do not believe that he is honest.I do not believe in his honest.
16. The correspondent reports that Nehru arrived in Delhi.Nehu is reported to have arrived in Delhi.
17. It is known that they were honest.They are known to have been honest.
18. I consider that he is honest..I consider him to be honest. or He is cosidered to be honest.
19. I thought he was seven- teen at the time of his marriage.He was thought to be seventeen at the of his marriage

 

A Complex sentence may be changed into a Simple sentence by using the Nominative Absolute Construction.

ComplexSimple
As the wind was foourable, the ship set sail.The wind, being favourable, the ship set sail.

From Complex to Compound

A Complex sentence may be changed into a Compound sentence by changing the subordinate clause into a Co-ordi- nating Principal clause with the aid of a Co-ordinating conjunction.

ComplexCompound
1. I love him because he is good.He is good and therefore I love him.
2. Unless you mend your ways, you will get into trouble.You must mend your ways if not (= otherwise) you will get into trouble.
3. The more one reads the wiser one grows.One has already read much, and it only makes one grow so much wiser.
4. I am sure that you are doing your best.You are doing your best and I am sure of it.
5. He would gladly give me money, if he had any to spare.He had no money to spare or he would gladly give me.
6. He loved me so much that he sacrificed his life for my sake.He sacrified his life for my sake and he loved me so much (or such was his love).
7. Don’t waste your time lest you should fail.You may fail and therefore do not waste your time.
8. I have found the book that I lost.I lost a book and I have found it.
9. He talks as if he were mad.He talks like a mad man, but he is not mad.
10. All stood up as soon as he entered.He entered and immediately all stood up.
11. You have not acted as I advised you.I advised you, but you have not acted accordingly.
12. If he meets me, I will tell him to stay away.He may meet me, and in that case I will tell him to stay away
13. I will make tea when the kettle boils.Let the kettle boil, and then I will make tea.
14. I will do my best lest I should be judged unfit.I do not wish to be judged unfit and therefore I will do my best.
15. I correct the boy whenever he goes wrong.The boy occasionally goes wrong but I always correct him.
16. We have had nothing but trouble, since he came here.He came here, and we have had nothing but trouble since.
17. He is more industrious than clever.He is somewhat clever, but his industry exceeds his cleveness.
18. He did not leave her till she gave her promise.She gave her promise and it was only then that he left her.
19. If he is right, I must be wrong.He or I must be wrong.
20. If he confesses his guilt, I shall excuse him.Let him confess his guilt and in that case I shall excuse him.
21. You may ask why I resigned the post.I resigned the post, and you may ask the reason for it.
22. If only I meethim, I can convince him.Let me but once meet him and  I can convince him.

From Compound to Complex

A Compound sentence may be converted into a Com- plex sentence by changing all the principal clauses retaining only one, into one or more subordinate clauses with the help of one or more subordinating conjunctions.

CompoundComplex
1. The boy was ill and so he could not attend school.The boy could not attend school as he was ill.
2. We are few, but we are of the right sort.Though we are few, we are of the right sort.
3. He saw the danger and paused.When he saw the danger, he paused.
4. He aimed at winning the prize and worked hard.He worked hard that he might. win the prize.
5. He had to sign or be executed.If he had not signed, he would have been excecuted.
6. Fast bind, fast find.When you have found some thing make sure your possession of it (or) Lock up what you would not lose.
7. First finish your lessons, then you may go out to play.When you have finished your lessons, you may go out to play.
8. He staggers like a drunken man, but he is not truly drunk.He staggers as if he had drunk.

From Simple to Compound

A Simple sentence may be converted into a Compound sentence by changing a phrase into a Co-ordinating Principal clause with the aid of a Co-ordinating conjunction.

SimpleCompound
1. Notwithstanding all his efforts, he failed.He made several efforts but failed.
2. I punished him for his negligence.He was negligent and there- fore I punished him.
3. But for his laziness, he would have passed.He was lazy, or else (otherwise) he would have passed. (or) He was lazy, hence he failed.
4. Besides robbing the child, he murdered it.He not only robbed the child but murdered it.
5. He must confess his fault to escape being fined.He must confess his fault or he will be fined.
6. Owing to bad health he could not work.He was in bad health, and so he could not work.
7. To his disgrace he betrayed his country.He betrayed his country and this was to his disgrace.
8. To avoid punishment you must confess.Either you must confess or you must be punished.
9. The sun having risen the fog disappeared.The sun rose and he fog disappeared.
10. In the event of his being late, he will be punishedHe must not be late or he will be punished.
11. Failing prompt payment of the bill, the goods must be returned.You must either pay the bill at once or return the goods.
12. Finding a lion’s skin an ass put it on to frighten the other beasts.An ass found a lion’s skin and put it on to frighten the other beasts.
13. You must work hard in order to pass.You must work hard or you will not pass.
14. You may escape by running away..Run away, otherwise you will be caught (or) You may run away and thus escape.
15. His boldness grew in proportion to his difficulties.His difficulties already became great, but they only made him grow so much bolder.
16. By walking fast youcan catch the train.Walk fast and you can catch the train.

 

Combine the folliwing sets into (a) Simple, (b) Complex and (b) Compound sentences:

(1) Rama was th son of Dasaratha. He ruled over Ayodhya.
(2) He was a mere boy. He offered to fight with the giant.
(3) He studied hard. He failed in the examination.
(4) Turn to the left. You will find a temple.
(5) Work hard. Otherwise you will fail.
(6) Complete the work by this evening. You will be fined.
(7) Sita is clever. She is also good.
(8) He heard a loud sound. He woke up.
(9) The wind was favourable. The ship sailed fast.
(10) He was tired of play. He sat down to rest.
(11) He is very weak. He cannot walk to school.
(12) He worked hard. Otherwise he would have failed.
(13) He ran. He would have missed the train.
(14) He has already read much. It only makes him grow so much wiser.
(15) He is good. I love him.
(16) He sacrificed his life for my sake. He loved me so much.
(17) The teacher entered the class. At once all the pupils stood up.
(18) He helped me. Otherwise I should have been drowned.
(19) The girl was robbed of her jewellery. She was also murdered.
(20) The sun had set. He darkened the landscape.
(21) The sun had set. We stopped playing foot-ball.
(22) I will do my best. I do not wish to be judged unfit.
(23) I advised you how to act. You did not act accordingly.
(24) You are directed how to rewrite the sentences. Rewrite them accordingly.
(25) There were no rains. The crops failed.
(26) I sent my servant to the market. He was to buy fruits for me.
(27) He wants to get through the examination. He worked hard.
(28) He was punished. That was right.
(29) His friends arrived in time. He was very pleased.
(30) He is feverish. He has applied for leave. (
31) A was more intelligent than B. A failed.
(32) Speak the truth I kill you.
(33) Speak the truth. I reward you.
(34) Rama heard of his success in the examination. This was to his great joy.
(35) Do not waste time. You may fail.
(36) He had arrived. He slept for an hour.
(37) He was going through a forest. He met a tiger.
(38) I received no replies to my letters. I therefore issued a registered notice.
(39) Krishna had all the benefits of education and wealth. He never made a name.
(40) I bought a table. It was made of stainless steel.
(41) He has failed narrowly only in one subject by a few marks. He wishes to sit for the whole examination.
(42) The general had fled. The army was defeated.
(43) The post was attacked by superior numbers. The defenders had to surrender.
(44) He opened the box. He found a gold necklace.
(45). My friend joined the army. I have not seen him since
(46) I joined the army. I have not seen my son so far.
(47) creditors. This was very dishonest.
(48) Rama was very tall. He could jump over the wall.
(50) It must be done. We should not count the cost.
(51) I have seen an advertisement for a typist’s post in ‘The Express’. I apply for it.
(52) He may meci me. In that case I shall give him your letter.
(53) He was short of funds. Otherwise he would spare me some money.
(54) He rarely commits blunders. I invariably punish him.
(55) He oc- casionally pays me a visit. He always brings me a fruit.
(56) He must not be late. He will be punished. (57) You travel more. You will grow so much experienced.

Ans: (1) Rama the son of Dasaratha, ruled over Ayodhya. Rama, who was the son of Dasaratha, ruled over Ayodhya. Rama was the son of Dasaratha and he ruled over Ayodhya.
(2) In spite of (despite) his being a mere boy, he offered to fight with the giant. Though he was a mere boy, he offered to fight with the giant. He was a mere boy but he offered to fight with the giant.
(4) Turning to the left, you will find a temple. If you turn to the left, you will find a temple.. Turn to the left and you will find a temple.
(5) Failing to work hard you will not pass. If you do not work hard (or Unless you work hard) you will fail. Work hard or you will fail.
(7) Besides being clever, Sita is good. Sita who is clever is also good. Sita is not only clever but good.
(8) On hearning a loud sound he woke up. When he heard a loud sound, he woke up. He woke up for he heard a lound sound.
(9) The wind being favourable, the ship sailed fast. The ship sailed fast because the wind was favourable. The wind was favourable and therefore the ship sailed fast.
(12) But for his hard work, he would have failed. If he had not worked hard, he would have failed. He worked hard, so he passed.
(14) His wisdom is in proportion to his reading. The more he reads, the wiser he grows. He has already read much and it only makes him grow so much wiser.
(22) I will do my best so as not to be judged unfit. I will do my best lest I should be judged unfit. I do not wish to be judged unfit, so I will do my best.
(24) Rewrite the sentences according to the direction. Rewrite the sentences as directed.
(28) He was rightly punished. It was right (that) he was punished.
(29) The timely arrival of his friends pleased him. He was pleased that his friends arrived in time.
(30) To his great joy, Rama heard of his success in the examination. He was rejoiced to hear that he passed the examination.
(35) You may fail by wasting time. Do not waste time lest you should fail. Do not waste time, otherwise, you may fail.
(48) He fled his creditors….a dis-honest act. (or) It was dishonest of him to have fled from his creditors.
(40) It must be done at any cost. It must be done whatever it might cost. It must be done, no matter what it costs.
(51) Having seen an advertisement for a typist’s post in “The Express” I apply for it. I apply for a typist’s post for which I have seen an advertisement in “The Express”.
(52) In the event of (in case of) his meeting me, I shall give him your letter. If he meets me, I shall give him your letter. Let him meet me and I shall give your letter.
(53) Except for want of sufficient funds, he would spare me some (money). He had no money to spare, otherwise he would spare me some (money).
(54) 1 invariably punish him even for blunders rarely committed. I invariably punish him for blunders though he commits them rarely. He rarely commits blunders, but I invariably punish him.
(55) He occasionally pays me a visit bringing me a fruit every time. He brings me a fruit whenever he pays me an occasional visit. He occasionally pays me a visit, but he always brings me a fruit.
(56) In the event of his being late he will be punished. If he comes late, he will be punished He must not be late or hewill be punished.

Composition : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

Composition

Subjects for Sentence – making
(a) Write three or four sentences about each of:
(1) Fire (2) The sun (3) The sea (4) Bread (5) Cotton (6) The table (7) Pens (8) Ink (9) Paper (10) Pencil (11) Copper (12) Gold (13) Knife (14) Clock (15) Book (16) Chair (17) Water (18) Mango (19) Milk (20) The orange (21) The sky (22) Houses (23) Carriages (24) The cow (25) The elephant (26) The jackal (27) The cat (28) The tiger (29) The horse (30) The cow (31) The moon (32) The stars (33) The coconut tree (34) The lion (35) Wool (36) Boots (37) Hats (38) The plantain tree (39) The black board (40) The school-room (41) Goats (42) The air (43) The cycle (44) Sugar (45) Salt (46) The police-man (47) The postman (48) The clock-tower (49) The parrot (50) Iron (51) Silver.
(b) Write one or two sentences for each pair of words in: (1) Fire, food (2) Sun, earth (3) Moon, light (4) Boy, slate (5) Bread, flour (6) Pen, boy (7) Man, fruit (8) Ink, bottle (9) Horse, man (10) Wheel, carts (11) Teacher, map (12) Teacher, black-board (13) The sea, ship (14) Rats, cats (15) Man, chair (16) Pot, water (17) Sugar, milk (18) The boy, mat (19) The boy, book (20) The man, cow.

Composition Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

Subject for Conversation

1. Black-board
(1) What is it made of? (2) What is its shape? (3) What is its colour? (4) Why is it painted black? (5) What is it used for? (6) Where is it hung? (7) Where is it sometimes fixed? (8) With what do you write on it? Why? (9) With what is cleaned?

2. Ink-Stand
(1) What is it made of? (2) What is its shape? (3) What does it contain? (4) What are the different kinds of ink? (5) What ink is largely used? (6) What is sometimes put into the ink-stand to keep the ink from drying (cotton)

3. A Book
(1) What is it made of? (2) What is its shape? (3) On what are books written? (4) What kind of covering is given to copy- books and exercise books? (5) What kind of covering is given to other books? (6) Where are books kept for people to read? (7). What are the uses of books?

4. A Chair
(1) What is it made of? (2) What are its parts? (3) What are its back and bottom made of? (4) How many legs has it? (5) How many arms has it? (6) Are there chairs without arms? (7) What are those chairs called? (8) What is a chair used for?

5. Class-room
What things does the room contain? (1) Benches: what are they made of? What are they used for? (2) Desks: what are they made of? And what are they used for? (3) Chairs:what are they made of? What are they used for? (4) Black-board: what is it made of? What is it used for? (5) Table: what is it used for? What is it made of?

6. Body and its parts
(1) What parts is the body made up of? (2) What is each part used for? (3) Where does each part lie?

7. The Sun
(1) What is the shape of the sun? (2) What does he give us? (3) Where does the sun rise and where does he set? (4) When does the sun rise and when does he set? (5) What are caused by the sun? (6) What would happen if there were no sun? Why? (7) Where do you see the sun? (8) Can you look at the sun? Why not? (9) Why are the stars not seen in the day? (10) Why does the sun seem so small to us?

8. The Moon
(1) What is the shape of the moon? (2) What do we get from the moon, and what do we not get? (3) Where does the moon rise and where does it set? (4) Where is the moon found? (5) Can we see the stars when the moon is shining? Why? (6) Can we look at the moon? Why? (7) Are the moon’s rays hot or cool? (8) Where does the moon get its light from? (9) Is the moon always of the same size? (10) For how many days does it increase in brightness. (11) For how many days does it decrease? (12) What are ‘Full moon’ and ‘New moon”?

9. Fire
(1) How is it made? (2) Can we live without fire? (3) With what do we make fire? (4) For what purpose do we want fire? (5) How is it useful in winter? (6) Is it sometimes harmful to us? (7) How is it harmful to us? (8) What is a fire-engine?

10. Water
(1) Where is it found? (2) How many kinds of water are there? (Fresh and Salt) (4) Where is one kind of water found? (4) Where is the other kind of water found? (5) What are the several uses of water? (6) How are seas and rivers useful to us?

11. Clock
(1) What has the clock in front of it? (2) What colour is the dial? (3) What do we see on it? (4) What are those that go round the dial? (5) What are they called? (6) What does one hand show? (7) What does the other hand show? (8) What does the clock do at the end of every hour to tell us the time? (9) What is the clock made of? What has it inside?

12. Sugar
(1) What colour is sugar? (2) What is its tase? (3) Do all people like sugar? (4) From what is sugar made? (5) Which is the best kind of sugar? (6) How is it prepared? (7) What are the uses of sugar? (8) Is sugar made from any other thing besides sugar-cane?

13. Milk
(1) What is its colour? (2) What is its taste? (3) What animals give us milk? (4) Which animal’s milk is the best? (5) Why is it the best? (6) What things are made from milk? (7) Why do men drink milk? (8) How is milk preserved? In what form? (9) For whom is this kind of milk largely used?

14. Salt
(1) What colour is salt? (2) What is its taste? (3) Where is it found? (4) How do we get it from the sea water? (5) May we prepare it? (6) Where else can we get it? (7) What are the uses of salt? (8) Is it very dear?

15. The Mango Tree
(1) Is it a small tree or a big tree? (2) How high does it grow? (3) Has it a trunk and branches? (4) How many kinds of mango trees are there? (5) Are all mango fruits sweet? (6) What do people do with sour ones? (pickles) (7) What use is made of the tree? (8) At what time of the year does it yield fruit? (9) In what soil does it grow well?

16. The Coconut Tree
(1) In what kind of countries do coconut trees grow? (2) Where do they grow best? (3) In what kind of soil do they grow well? (4) Is the coconut tree like the other trees? (5) What is the difference between it and the other trees? (tall, slender stem with a bunch of long leaves at the top). (6) Has it branches? (7) To what height does the tree grow? (8) What are its long leaves like? (feathers.) (9) Where are the fruits found? (10) What use is made of the several parts of the tree? (the leaves, the covering of the nut, the shell, the nut) (11) How long does it live?

17. The Plantain Tree
(1) What kind of stem has it? (hard or soft) (2) What kind of leaves has it? (3) Has it any branches? (4) What kind of soil does it need? (5) Are there many kinds of plantain trees? (6) How high does it grow? (7) What does the tree chiefly want for its growth? (8) How long does the tree live? (9) What use is made of the tree? (the stem, the leaves, the fruits) (10) Does the tree give us any seed to grow fresh trees? (11) How do we get fresh trees? (12) What are green plantains used for? (13) What are ripe ones used for?

18. The Cotton Plant
(1) Is it a big plant or a small plant? (2) Has it any branches? (3) How high does it grow? (4) Are there many kinds of the cotton plants? (5) Do’all of them have the same kind of flower? (6) In what kind of soil does it grow best? (7) What do we get from the plants? (8) Where is it found? (9) What use is made of the cotton? (10) What use is made of the seeds?

19. The Cow
(1) Is it a domestic animal or a wild animal? (2) Has it horns? (3) In what countries is it found? (4) Why do men keep it? (5) What kind of animal is it? (gentle) (6) What does it give us? (7) What do we do with its milk? (8) How is it useful to us? (9) How is it useful to children? (chief food) (10) What does the cow eat? (11) Where does the cow graze? (12) What is the difference between English cows and Indian cows? (hump) (13) What is the young one of a cow called? (14) What is its keeper called?

20. The Horse
(1) Is it a four legged animal? (2) Has it horns? (3) What kind of animal is it? (noble, intelligent, strong) (4) How does it run? (5) Does it run faster than the bullock? (6) Name some kinds of horses. (7) What is the food of the horse? (8) What are the uses of the horse? (drawing carriages, riding, wars, circuses, ploughing in England). (9) Is it faithful to its master? (10) What is its young one called? (11) What is its keeper called? (12) What is its house called?

21. The Bullock
(1) Is it a domestic animal? (2) How many legs has it? (3) How high does it grow? (4) What does it eat? (5) What are the uses of the bullock? (6) What are the two kinds of bullock- carts? (7) Can the bullock run as fast as the horse? (8) Is it used for riding? (9) How is it useful to man?

22. The Dog
(1) Is it useful to man? (2) How big is it? (3) How many legs has it? (4) What does it eat? (5) Has it horns? (6) Name some different kinds of dogs. (7) What is each kind used for? (8) Why do people keep dogs? (9) How are they useful to men? (guard houses, keep company) (10) What are the dogs noted for? (scent; hunt; give up even their lives to save their master; for detection) (11) What is a young dog called? (12) What is its house called?

23. The Goat
(1) What is the size of the animal? (2) How many legs has it? (3) What kind of animal is it? (4) What is a young goat called ? (5) What do the goats eat? (6) Why do people keep goats? (milk, flesh) (7) Are they used in the circuses? (8) Are the young goats nice to look at? (9) Is its flesh in any way useful?

24. The Sheep
(1) Is it a big animal? (2) How many legs has it? (3) Has it horns? (4) Is it a gentle animal? (5) With what is its body covered? (6) What is a young sheep called? (7) What do the sheep eat? (8) Why do men keep them? (flesh, milk and wool) (9) What are made from its fur? (10) Is its flesh eaten? (11) Are sheep used for manuring the fields? How? (12) What are a number of sheep called? (13) Where are they kept? (14) What is their keeper called?

25. The Cat
(1) Is it a big animal? (2) Are some people very fond of cats? (3) Do they look upon them as their children? (4) With what is its body covered? Why? (5) What kind of eyes has it? Why (6) How are the whiskers useful? (7) What kind of feet has it? Why? (8) What animal is it very fond of killing? (9) When does the cat catch it? (10) Does it eat any other food? (11) How is it useful to men? (12) How is it troublesome to men?

26. The Camel
(1) is it a beautiful animal? (2) Is its neck long or short? (3) Has it a hump? (4) How are its legs? (5) How are its feet? Why? (6) In what countries are the camels found? (7) Can they live without food and water for a long time? (8) Why are they made so? Can they carry very heavy loads? (10) Is it a patient animal? (11) Does it obey its master? (12) Why is it called the ship of the desert? (13) What is a long line of camels carrying men and goods called? (caravan)

27. The Elephant
(1) What is the largest of all land animals? (2) Has it a huge body or small body? (3) How are its legs and what are they like? Why? (4) How is its neck? Why? (5) Is its nose like that of other animals? (6) What has it in place of the nose? (7) What has the turnk at its end? What has it on both sides? (8) What does it do with its trunk? (9) Is it an intelligent animal? (10) What does it eat? (11) What are the uses of the elephant? (Draw very heavy loads, carry guns in wars, circuses, ridden by kings on grand occasions). (12) Does it obey its keeper? (13) What is the keeper called? (14) What are the uses of its tusks?

28. The crow
(1) What is it? (2) What is its colour? (3) Where is it found? (4) Has it ears? (5) What kind of mouth has it? (6) What is it called? (7) Where does the bird live? (8) What is its house called? (9) Where does it build it? (10) What is it made of? (11) What does the bird eat? (12) Is it useful to men? How? (13) Is it troublesome to men? How? (14) What is its cry believed to tell?

Hints for Composition

1. The Tower Clock
A tall building-built of stone-square or round in form a clock is fixed at the top-four big dials-on sides- bold figures and bold hands-people may see from all side’s and from far-a big bell hung inside-strikes hours-loud sound-eople far away cannot hear-noise of people in the streets-heard at night-no noise-all people sleep a light is! put inside enables people to see the hands and figures-steps inside for men to go up-wind the clock-repair it-light the lamp.
2. A Railway Station
A place where the trains stop at fixed hours-platform passengers get in and get down-several rooms-the Station Master’s room-Booking office-Telegraph office-Ladies waiting room-Gentlemen’s waiting room-Refreshment room-tickets sold in booking office-place where carts and carriages wait-fruit shops-book-stalls-signal post-bal- ance fence on both sides-flower trees-water supply-la- trines-bath-room-godowns for keeping goods in-a pleas-
ant sight.
3. The Postman
A person who brings letters from the post office wears trousers, a coat, aturban sometimes-a belt-delivers letters, parcels, morning and evening-not only letters and parcels but money orders a leather bag hanging from the shoulder- places letters, money and parcels in it-must be able to read and write has to read the addresses on the letters-honest active and strong-must be careful and polite-had to walk a long distance-if gentle, gets small presents from the address- ees-in towns rides on a bicycle-many streets-one or two not enough-one man for every two or three streets.
4. The Lion
A wild animal-fierce to look at-lives in mountain. caves and forests-strongest of all animals-kills even the elephant-hence” the king of the beasts”-cat kind-feet soft and fleshy can walk without making even the slightest noise draws in or out its claws at will-head very large-big sharp fangs-body grey in colour-long hair flowing from. neck and head-called mane-the lioness has no mane-hunts by nights and sleeps by day-noblest of animals-attacks only when hungry or annoye-largely found in Africa-its use in Circus and Public gardens.
N. B: The teacher may read the story (once, twice or thrice, if necessary) slowly and aloud till the puplis follow him; or the pupils may be asked to read the story for themselves silently till it is understood; immediately aftrwards he should get the pupils to write it down from memory.
1. The Lion and the Mouse
A Lion lay sleeping under a shady tree. It was roused from sleep by a Mouse that ran on his face. The fierce beast caught him and would have killed him but the poor Mouse cried out, “Oh! King of beasts, if you would but spare my life, I will be sure to pay back your kindness some day”. The Lion laughed and let him go. By and by the Lion was caught in a snare and began to cry loudly. The Mouse heard him roar and came up to help him. He bit the ropes with his sharp teeth and set the Lion free.
Moral: No one is too small to help in time of need.
2. Belling the Cat
Once upon a time some merry little Mice went out to play. A very cruel Cat was lying in the way. So, many Mice went out, but only a few came back. They were in great fear of the cat. They did not dare to come out day or night, for fear she would kill them. So they all met to talk of the best thing for them to do. Several plans were talked over, but not one seemed worth much. At last, a young Mouse proposed that a bell should be hung round the Cat’s neck, so that whenever she was coming they would hear her bell and could run into their holes. Every mouse praised this proposal, but at last, an old Mouse asked quickly who was going to bell the Cat. To attempt to do a dangerous thing is ‘to Bell the Cat.
Moral: It is easier said than done.
3. The Boy and the Thief
Once a boy sat weeping upon the side of a well. A thief happening to come by just at the same time asked him why he was weeping. The boy sighing and sobbing showed a bit of cord and said that a silver jewel had come off from it and fallen into the well. The thief pulled off his clothes and went down into the well, meaning to keep the jewel for himlelf. Having groped about for some time in vain, he came up and found not only the boy gone, but his clothes; for the rogue had made off (run away) with them.
Moral: Deceit deserves to be deceived.
4. The Wolf and the Lamb
Once a wolf coming to a brook to drink, saw a lamb standing in the stream some distance down. The wolf having a mind to pick a quarrel with him, asked him what he meant by disturbing the water and making it so muddy. The lamb answered meekly that he could not see how that could be, since the water which he drank, ran down from the wolf to him. “Be that as it may”, replied the wolf, “you called me bad names a year ago”. “Sir”, said the lamb, “You are mistaken; a year ago I was not born”. “Then”, said the hungry wolf, “if it was not you, it was your father, and that is all one. It is of no use trying to argue with me”. So saying, he fell upon the poor creature and ate him up.
evil.
Moral: Wicked men will always find some excuse for doing
5. The Countryman and his Cart
A countryman was one day carelessly driving his cart along a miry lane. The wheel stuck so deep in the mud, that the houses came to a standstill. Upon this, the man made no effort of his own to get the wagon to move but began to call upon Hercules to come and help him in his distress. But Hercules told him to put his shoulder to the wheel, as he helped only those that tried to help themselves. The man did so and Hercules assisted him to push the wagon. In this way he got out of the difficulty.
Moral: Heaven (God) helps those that help themselves.

6. The Countryman and the Snake.
One frosty day in winter a villager found a snake under a hedge, almost dead with cold. Taking pity upon the poor creature, he brought it home and laid it on the hearth near the fire. Revived by the heat, it rose up and with dreadful hissing flew at the wife and children of its benefactor. The man hearing their cries rushed in, and with an axe which he brought in his hand soon cut the snake in pieces. ‘Vile wretch’ said he, “is this the reward you make to him who saved your life? Die as you deserve”.
Moral: The greatest benefits can never bind the ungrateful.
7. The Bear and the two Travellers
Two men travelling together through a forest, mutually promised to stand by each other in any danger they should meet with upon the way. They had not gone far, before a Bear came rushing towards them out of the forest upon which one of them got up into a high tree. The other seeing that he had no chance single-handed against the Bear, fell flat on his back upon the ground, as if dead and held his breath. He did this, as he knew that bears would never touch a dead body. The Bear came up, smelt him, and supposing him to be dead, went back again into the wood without doing him the least harm. When the Bear had gone out of sight, the other man came down from the tree and asked his friend, with a pleasant smile, what the Bear had said to him when he put his mouth close to his ear. The one said calmly that the Bear had told him, never to trust those who look to their own safety and leave their friends to themselves in time of danger.
Moral: Never trust those who desert their friends at the approach of danger.
or Trust only proven friends.
8. The Jackal and the Fleas
Once a jackal was very much troubled by fleas. He wanted to get rid of them. So he went to a tank and found a dry stick on the bank. He took it in his mouth and walked slowly into the water. The fleas on his feet flew upon his legs. He then went farther into the water. The fleas on his legs flew upon to his body. He then went still farther into the water. The fleas on his body flew on to his head. He then plunged his head under water. Then the fleas on his head flew up on to the dry stick in his mouth. The jackal then left the dry stick in the water and quickly made off to the shore. He thus got rid of the fleas.
Moral: Knowledge is power.
9. The Man and his two Wives
In a country where men could have more than one wife, a certain man, whose head was fast turning grey had two wives, one a little older than himself, and the other much younger. The young wife being of a liverly turn (disposition) did not want people to think that she had an old husband, and so she used to pull out as many of his white hairs as she could. The old wife on the other hand did not wish to seem older than her husband and so she used to pull out the black hairs. This went on until at last, between them both, they made the poor man quite bald.
Moral: It is miserable to have more than one wife.
10. The Fox and the Stork
Once a clever Fox wanted to play a trick upon a Stork. So one day he invited the Stork to dine with him. The Stork accepted the invitation. He arrived very hungry. A shallow dish was placed before him and soup was poured into it. The Stork could only wet the tip of his long bill for the dish was flat and shallow. The Fox quickly licked the dish clean and asked the Stork, if he did not like the soup; and the latter took it to his heart. It was now the Stork’s turn to invite the Fox to dinner. He invited the Fox with great respect and placed the food in a narrow-necked jar. The Fox could not eat anything out of the jar, but the Stork by means of his long bill emptied the jar. All that the Fox could get was only a little liquid that ran down the sides of the vessel.
Moral: “Tit for Tat’ or “To pay one in the same coin’

11. Mercury and the Woodman
A Woodman was once cutting a tree beside a deep river. By chance he let slip his axe into the water. Sad at the loss of his tool, he sat down and wept. Mercury hearing his cries, ap- peared to him and asked him what was the matter. When he heard the man’s tale, the god dived into the river and brought up a golden axe. “Is this the axe which you lost”? asked the god. “No” said the Woodman. Then the god dived a second time and brought up a silver axe and asked him if that was his axe. The Woodman again answered that it was not his. So Mercury dived a third time and then brought up the axe which he had lost. That is mine’ cried the Woodman joyfully. The god gave it to him and presented him with the other two as a reward for his truth and honesty.
Moral: Honesty is the best policy.
12. The Boy and his Mother
A little boy, who went to school, stole one of his school fellow’s books and took it home. His mother instead of correcting him, took the book and sold it and gave him an apple for his pains. In the course of time the boy became a robber, and at last was tried and sentenced to death. When he was led to the gallows, a great crowd of people followed. His mother also followed weeping bitterly. He prayed the officers to grant him the favour of a few parting words with her, and his request was freely granted. He approached his mother, put his arm round her neck, and making as though he would whisper something in her ear, bit it off. Her cry of pain drew everybody’s eyes upon them, and filled the minds of all with great indignation, “Nay, good people” said he, “do not be deceived. My first theft was that of a book, which I gave to my mother. Had she whipped me for it, instead of praising me, I should not have come to the gallows”.
Moral: Spare the rod, and spoil the child.
13. The Jackdaw and the Pigeons
A Jackdaw seeing how well some Pigeons in a dovecote fed, and how happily they lived together, wished very much to join them. With this view he whitened his feathers and slipped in, one evening just as it was getting dark. So long as he kept silent he escaped notice, but gradually grew very familiar with them and in a jolly mood he burst into a loud laugh. His voice at once betrayed him. The Pigeons fell upon him and drove him out. When he wanted to join the Jackdaws again, his coloured feathers drew their attention to him and his former friends would not admit him. back.
Moral: Never appear in borrowed feathers.
14. The Clever Cooly
Once a certain cooly agreed with a farmer to dig a well for a sum of money. He worked the whole day and dug down about five feet.
Early next morning when he came to the well he found that the side of the well had fallen in and filled up half of the pit. After thinking a little, he put down his crowbar and his upper cloth, by the side of the well and went home and lay down.
Some time after, the farmer came out and seeing the earth in the well and the cooly’s crowbar and upper cloth lying near it, he thought that the cooly had been buried by the earth. The farmer, therefore called the neighbours and asked them to help him to dig out the cooly. The neighbours came and when they had dug out almost all the earth, they were astonished to see the cooly coming towards the well.
The cooly thanked them for digging the well, but the neighbours were very angry at his trick.
Moral: Knowledge is power.
15. The Belly and the other Members of the Body.
The members of the body once rebelled against the Belly. They said that he led an idle and lazy life at their expense. The hands said that they would not again lift a (morsel) crust even to keep him from starving; the mouth said that it would not take in even a bit of food any longer; the legs said they would carry him about no longer; the others said likewise.
The Belly quietly allowed them to follow their own courses, well knowing that they would all soon come to their senses. They did so, when for want of nourishment supplied by the stomach, they found themselves fast becoming mere skin and bone.
Moral: None for themselves are born. or Serve and be served.

16. The Raven and the Serpent
A hungry Raven, flying about in search of prey, came across a Snake lying at full lenth on a sunny bank. He seized him in his horny beak and would have devoured him, but the Snake turning round bit the Raven with his venomous fangs, so that he died in great pain. In dying he confessed that he was justly served for seeking to satisfy his appetite at the expense of another’s life.
Moral: Irm seek, harm find.
17. The Monkey and the Cats
Once two Cats found a piece of cheese and wanted to divide it between them. One of them cut it into two pieces so that they might take one each. But one piece was larger than the other. Each wanted to have the larger piece. So they quarrelled and went to a Monkey and asked him to settle their dispute.
The Monkey in all seriousness took up a balance and put the two pieces in the two scale pans of the balance. One piece was found heavier. So he bit off a portion from the bigger one to make it equal to the other. In so doing he took care to bite off so much of it as to make it lighter. Then he put it into the balance and found the other piece heavier. Then he nibbled a portion from this one and made it lighter. He thus went on biting a portion from each piece until at last the two pieces became very small.
Then the two Cats growing wiser asked the judge to give them what was left. But the Monkey at once put the whole into his mouth saying it was the judge’s fee.
Moral: Never go to law.
18. The Chameleon
Two travellers happened on their journey to get into a warm dispute about the colour of the Chameleon. One of them affirmed it was blue and that he had observed it with his own eyes in the cooling shade of tree. The other retorted it was green, saying he had seen it enjoying the bright sunshine. From words they almost came to blows, when a third person luckily coming by, they agreed to refer the question to his decision. “Gentlemen” said the umpire, “you are both mistaken, for the creature is totally black; and I examined it only last night by a candle light. “Black impossible!” they cried out, when to solve the doubt, the arbitrator (the third person) drew it out of his pocket. And lo! it was white as snow. The three looked equally surprised and foolish. Seeing this the Chameleon thus advised them: “My children, you are all right ” only you observed me under different circumstances. When next you talk of what you see, remember others can see as well as you”.
Moral: Respect others’ opinions.
19. The Two Frogs
One hot summer, the lake in which two Frogs lived was completely dried up and they were obliged to set off in search of water elsewhere. Coming to a deep and delightfully cool well, one of the Frogs proposed that they should jump in at once. “Wait a bit”, cried the other, “if that should dry up, how could we get out again”?
Moral: Look before you leap.
20. The Lion and the old Hare
Once in a forest a Lion was killing animals every day as he liked, so that not one felt safe for a moment. At last all the animals held a meeting to think of a plan by which they might live in peace.
On the advice of the fox, they wrote a letter to the Lion in these words; “My Lord, if you go on killing us at this rate, very soon none of us will be left, and you will have to starve. If it pleases you, we will send you one of us every day, and this will save you all the trouble of hunting”.
To this the Lion consented. Thereupon the beasts cast lots every day, and the animal on who the lot fell went of his own accord to the Lion. One day it was an old Hare’s turn to be food for the Lion. He went slowly on purpose and it was late by the time he got to the Lion’s den. “How dare you keep me waiting”? roared the Lion angrily. “Sir”, meekly answered the Hare, “I am not to blame; for on the way, I met another lion who wanted to eat me up but let me go here only after ! promised to go back to him”. Put out by this, the Lion wanted the Hare to take him to the place where his bold rival lived. The Hare led the way to a deep well and said, “My Lord, this is

Hints For Stories

where I left him; now he is drinking water down there.” Looking into the well, the Lion thought he saw the head of another lion who looked fierce and angry. Poor creature! He did not know it was himself that he saw. In a rage he leaped down into the well and died.
Thus the clever little Hare saved his own life and deliv- ered the other beasts of the forest from their enemy.
Moral: Wit is better than strength.
Hints to be expanded into Stories verytries to
1. A thirsty crow….. in search of water….. a jar. little water in it….. bends…..not reach the water overturn…..too heavy…..small stones nearby…..one by one into the pot…water rises up…drinks to his satisfaction …..flies away …..Moral.
2. Frogs croaking in pond…..boys throwing stones at them…..frogs complain…..”Only play”, say the boys…..”play to you; death to us,” say the frogs……Moral.
3. Fisherman…..small fish…..river…..looks at it…..fish begs…..back into river……says……now small…..grow bigger in course of time…..may catch then….fisherman says…..may grow big…..but not sure of catching…..puts into basket…..takes home……curry…..eats it…..Moral.
4. An old man…..a goose……a golden egg daily…..not satisfied …..wants more…..wants to kill it…..tells wife…..she agrees…..both kill the goose… …..no gold…..very sorry…..Moral.
5. A sphepherd boy…..looks after sheep….. cries, ‘Wolf’ ……fun…..neighbours come…..no wolf …..boy laughs …..next time…..the same…..people come…..no wolf ….. the boy laughs again…..next time wolf comes…..the boy cries…..none care …..wolf devours the sheep…..boy punished…..Moral
6. A merchant……salt trade…..bags of salt…..ass loaded …..crossing a stream…..ass stumbles and falls……salt melts away load lighter ass glad…..the trick continued ……merchant’s loss angry now loads with wool bags …… purposely falls…..load heavier…..ass punished…..Moral. 7. A crow….steals cheese…flies…tree…fox sees …..wants…..himself …..begins to praise…..feathers beautiful …..beak pretty…..voice also sweet…..wants to hear…..asks ……song.foolish crow begins to sing. opens mouth …….cheese falis……picks up…..runs off…..Moral.
8. A fox… a goat…..friends……one day playing near a well…..fox fell in….. tried hard to get out…..in vain…..called out “friend…..pleasant bath…..come”poor goat believed…..jumped in fox climbed on his back……sprang out…..goat left in the well…..Moral (Look before you leap).
9. A fox…..very hungry…..goes about…..food…..some grapes.high tree…not reach.jumps fails to reach …..jumps again and again…..all his strength…..cannot get at …..goes away….says…..grapes are sour…..not worth having …..Moral.
10. Hare jeers…..tortoise…..slowness…..tortoise…..race- hare accepts….tortoise starts…..hare says, “I will take a nap first”…..hare awakes….. tortoise passes the post….. Moral (Slow and steady wins the race).
11. Old faather…..sons quarrel…..father’s advice not cared for…..father’s plan-bundle of sticks…..brought…..father asks…..break bundle…..no success…….bundle united…..sons break sticks easily….learn lesson…live in peace….. Moral (Union is strength).
12. A dispute…..the sun and the wind…..which stronger …..agree to try…..a passing traveller…..which, sooner makes him take off his cloak…..wind begins…..blows cold…..chill piercing.cloak drawn closer…..buttoned tight….the sun. tries next….. warm rays…..hot…sultry…..throws off cloak
…..Moral.
13. Forest…bag of money….found by three men …..agree to buy food…..one man goes…..puts poison in food …..other two think of killing him kill him…..food eaten …they two die……Moral.
14. Robert carrying heavy basket…..Tom will not help him…..a stranger helps…..carries it to the top of a hill….. Robert thanks….. years pass….. Robert rich…..stranger loses much money. ……Robert hears…….gives help…..the gentleman forgot him…..much surprised…..thanks him……Moral.
15. Washerman…..owns two animals ass….dog ……dog ill-fed…..night…..noise…..thieves…..dogawakes…..silent …..ass rebukes…..in vain…..himself cries…..master disturbed …..angry …..beats ass…..Moral.
16. Fox cat…..meeting in a forest…..the cleverer of tricks the two, who?…..fox knows many cat’s only trick ……sudden coming of hunters…..dogs…..cat climbing a tree …..fox many tricks…..puzzled pursued….. killed….. Moral.
17. Dog with bone…..noticed by crow…..crow’s trick …..flies away…..returns with another crow…..one pulls dog’s tail…..dog drops bone…..turnsround…..other flies away with bone…..Moral.

Complete the following stories by filling up the blanks:
1. The Country Mouse and the City Mouse Once…..a time a country mouse…..a friend in town. He ..the town mouse to pay…..to his country. Upon the latter’s ..he opened his heart and store. After dinner was….they set …..together…..journey to town. It was late…..evening when they crept….the city..
2. The Dove and the Ant
An ant….. to a river to quench…..fell…..stream. A dove took pity…..her and….. into the river a small bough. Seizing …..the ant….the shore. The ant afterwards saw a man…..his gun…..the dove. There upon she stung him….. the foot sharply and made him…..his aim and thus….. the dove’s.
3. The Dog and the Shadw.
A dog …..in his mouth a…..of meat, was…..a smooth stream by reais…..a plank. Looking…..he saw what he took to be another dog….. another piece of… Snapping geedily to ….. this as well, he let go the…..that he had and lost…..in the….. 4. The Woman and the Fat Hen
A woman had a hen….. laid an egg every ….. The eggs were very fine and sold…..a good price. The woman thought that if she gave……twice the usual quanity of food, the bird …be brought to lay….. a day insted of…..So the quantity of ……was doubled accordingly and the hen ..very fat and gave ….. laying altogether.
5. The Kid and the Wolf
A kid…..on the roof of a house saw a wolf …..by. Imme- diately it…..to taunt him. The wolf looking…..said, “Sirrah! I hear thee; yet it is not thou who…..me ….. the roof on which ….. art standing”
6. The Farmer and his Sons his sons to
A farmer feared he…. die shortly…..he. ….. bedside and said, “My sons, there is a great treasure…..our vineyard”. Shortly afterwards…..old man. Then the sons took their spades and carefully…..over every portion…..their land. They ……no treasure and cursed their…..but the vines more than repaid their labour…..yielding…..extraordinary
crop.

Punctuation : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

Punctuation

మాట్లాడునపుడు మనము అక్కడక్కడ అగుచు, కంఠధ్వని హెచ్చు తగ్గులచే మన అభిప్రాయమును ఎదుటివారికి స్పష్టీకరింతుము. మనము వ్రాయునపుడు గాని వ్రాసిన గ్రంథము చదువునపుడు గాని అదే స్పష్టత ఉండవలెనన్న Marks of Punctuation (విరామ చిహ్నములు) వాడవలెను. అట్టి Marks of Punctuation లేని వాక్యమును చదువునపుడు దానికి తప్పుటర్థము రావచ్చును ; అప్పుడప్పుడు అర్థము చేసికొనుటయు కష్టమగును. &: The young man says the old man is a fool. (Punctuation reveals the fool) ; as: (1) “The young man” says the old man “is a fool”. (2) The young man says, “The old man is a fool”.

ఈ దిగువ నుదహరించిన Punctuation Marks సాధారణముగా వాడుకలోనున్నవి.

1. Comma                                                  (,)
2. Semicolon                                              (;)
3. Colon                                                     (:)
4. Full stop or Period                                 (.)
5. Note or Mark of Interrogation              (?)
6. Note or Mark of Exclamation                (!)
7. Quotation Marks or inverted Commas (“”)
8. The Apostrophe                                    (‘)

ఇందు మొదటి నాలుగు విరామ చిహ్నములు.

Punctuation Definition And Types With Examples In Telugu

Read and Learn more English Grammar Topics

1. The comma marks the shortest pause. Its chief uses are: A. In a Simple sentence:
(a) Between nouns or pronouns in apposition; as :
Rama, the son of Dasharatha, ruled over Ajodhya.
b) To separate the same parts of speech, unless they are grouped by and:

1. He wrote accurately, forcibly and readily.
2. She glanced, smiled and bowed
(c) To separate each pair of words connected by and or as:
1. High and low, rich and poor, wise and foolish must all die.
2. By night or by day, at home or abroad, asleep or awake, he is a constant source of anxiety to his father.
(d) To indicate the omission of a verb; as:
1. To err is human, to forgive, divine.
2. Reading market a full man; conference, a ready man; and writing, an exact man.
(e) After an absolute construction; as:
(1) The sun having set, we all went home.
(2) To be plain with you, I do not believe your words.
(f) After the Nominative of Address; as
1. Boys, sit down.
2. Friends, Romans, Countrymen, lend me your ears.
(g) To introduce a sentence in Direct Speech; as:- He said, “I shall go now”.
(h) Afterword’s and phrases placed at the beginning of a sentence; as :-
1. Courageously, he undertook the leadership.
2. Straining every muscle, he won that race.
(a) Before and after, all short parentheses; as- The poor fellow, I am sorry to say, died the same evening.
B. In a Compound sentence the co-ordinate clauses are separated by commas when they are expressed at full length; as:-
He called at my house, but I was not at home.
N.B. But when the co-ordinate clauses are not ex-pressed at full length the comma is omitted; as:—-
I made haste and caught him.
C. In a Complex sentence an Adverb Clause is generally separated by a comma from the principal clause; as:- He will succeed, because he works hard.
But the comma is omitted when the Adverb Clause is either elliptical or very short.
1. He likes you better than me.
2. Send me word before you start.
(b) The Semicolon marks a longer pause than the comma. It is used;
(a) To separate long Co-ordinate Clause; as :-
Honesty of purpose in worldly affairs has many advantages over deceit; it is a safer way of dealing with men; it inspires men with greater confidence.
(b) To give greater emphasis to different clauses :-
1. The coconut tree gives us food; it gives us drink; it gives us material for roofing; it gives us oil; it gives us rope; it supplies us, indeed, with all the necessaries of life.
2. As Caesar loved me, I weep for him; as he was fortunate, I rejoice at it; as he was valiant, I honour him; but as he was ambitious, I slew him. So there is tears for his love; joy for                  his fortune; honour for his valour; and death for his ambi- tion.
c. The colon marks a longer pause than the semico- lon. It is used:
(a) When what follows confirms, repeats or amplifies the previous statement:
It is said that sleep is best before midnight; and nature hereself with her darkness informs us so (confirmation).
(b) Before enumerations (with or without the dash).
(1) The principal forms of a verb in English are: the present tense, the past tense and the past participle.
(2) The following articles are found in his pocket :- a pencil, a pen knife, a bit of chalk.
(c) To introduce a quotation or an example :-
(1) Dickens said: “It is better to be three hours earlier than one minute late”.
(2) The following is a good example: (amplication)
d. The Full Stop or Period.
It marks the longest pause and is used:
(a) At the end of every complete sentence, except inter- rogative and exclamatory ones:
(b) After abbreviations:
B.A. (= Bachelor of Arts). B.C. (=Before Christ).
Jan. (for January), Lat. = (Latin)
Note: (1) When the first and last letters of the abbreviation are also those of the full word, the full stop is omitted as: Wt. (=for weight), fot. (=for feet); Gk. (=for Greek); Mr. (=forMister)..
e. Note or mark of Interrogation.

It is used after:
(a) Direct questions. The sentence following must be commenced with a capital:-
1. Where was he born? When did he die ?
2. He asked me, “Have you been long at college?”
(b) Interrogative sentences which are in the form of statements or assertions:-
You came here to see your father?
Note: 1. Indirect questions do not take a mark of inter- rogation after them :-
He asked me if I had been long at college.
Note: 2. No question mark is needed at the end, when a polite request is made in an interrogative form :-
1. Could you kindly speak to your brother about my appointment.
2. Will you please grant me leave for to-day.
3. May I assure you of my hearty co-operation. The Note or Mark of Exclamation (!)
It is used to denote joy, sorrow, surprise etc., or when addressing a person. It is placed after interjections and after phrases and sentences expressing sudden emotion or wish:
(1) Alas!
(2) Ah me!
(3) What a fine house it is!
(4) Long live the king!
(5) Miserable man! You have been well punished.
(f)Quotation Marks or Inverted Commas(“……”)

They are used to enclose a quaotation or words in Divect speech :-
1. Solomon said, “Spare the rod and spoil the child”.
2. “Never mind”, she replied, “it made known to me what was wanted”.
Note: In the above, the reporting verb breaks up the quotation.
3. My friend replied, “Was it not Shakespeare who ob- served: ‘Give every man ear but few thy voice’?”
Note: If a quotation occurs within a quotation, it is marked by single quotation marks.
(g). The apostrophe () It is used (1) to mark the omission of a letter or a syllable or syllables; as: e’en (even), couldn’t (could not), don’t (do not), ven’ble (venerable).
2. In the Possessive case of Nouns: as: Rama’s book; Girls’ school.
3. To form the plural of letters and figures: as:
(1) Dot your i’s and cross your t’s
(2) Add two 5s and four 2s.
Ex. 55. B.
(a) Insert Commas where necessary, in the following, giving reasons:-

(1) The triple alliance consists of Germany, Austria and Italy.
(2) The roof of the house having caught fire the inmates fled and remained outside the house until the fire was put out.
(3) He found as I expected that the house he had lately purchased was a bad one.
(4) I remain my dear sir yours faithfully Ramarao.
(5) To tell you the truth I should be glad to retire from business altogether.
(6) The boatman shouted to a man on shore throw out the rope.
(7) In fact of all that was subscribed I gave the largest amount.
(8) A snake sleeping in the grass will bite if any one treads upon it.
(9) Potti Sreeramulu a disciple of Gandhi worked for Harijan uplift.
(10) He was a wise learned and honest judge.
(11) From morning till noon from noon to evening from evening to midnight this same grief never leaves him.
(12) O King live for ever.
(13) He was a Brahmin; she a Rajput.

(b) Insert Semicolons, in the following giving reasons:-
(1) To-day we love what to-morrow we hate to-day we seek what to-morrow we shun to-day we desire what to-morrow we fear.
(2) I met him as he was leaving his house otherwise I should not have known him where he lived.
(3) I refused to do what he asked me to do for I was convinced that he had been misinformed of the facts.
(4) If a king violates the solemn engagements if he oppresses, extorts, robs if he imprisons, confiscates, banishes at his sole will and pleasure his defence is that it is his privilege                    because the people are his subjects.
(5) The heavens declare the glory of God and the firma- ment showeth his handiwork.

(c) Insert Colons in the following, giving reasons:
(1) The following boys are absent Rama, Krishna and Satyanarayana.
(2) Strive above all things, in whatever station of life you may be, there is no happiness in life without it. Tennyson says more things are wrought by prayer than this world dreams of. (d) Punctuate the following passage, using capitals where necessary :-
(1) he perceiving my shadow on the wall by his bedside asked who was there sir I am here quoth i if i might see your grace well what is the time said he to me.
(2) how are the mighty fallen in the midst of the battle I am distressed for thee my brother jonathan Nonsense how can you talk such rubbish.
(3) They had played together in infancy they had worked together in manhood they were now tottering about and gossiping away the evening of life and in a short time they will                  probably be buried together in the neighbouring church- yard.
(4) The carthagenian army was composed entirely of mercenary troops africa spain and gaul were their recruiting grounds and these countries were an inexhaustible treasury of                    warriors as long as the money lasted which the recruits re- ceived as pay.

Pronouns : Definition & Types with Examples in Telugu

Pronouns (సర్వనామములు)

Pronouns తొమ్మిది విధములు :
1. Personal 2. Demonstrative 3. Relative 4. Interroga- tive 5. Reflexive 6. Indefinite 7. Distributive 8. Possessive 9. Reciprocal.
1. Personal Pronouns
I, we, thou, you, he 3ubox pronouns ges (persons) చెందును. గాన అవి Personal pronouns అనబడును.
Def: Personal pronouns are those which stand for the persons speaking, spoken to, or spoken of.
Personal Pronouns మూడు విధములు.
1. తన్ను గురించి చెప్పునవి; Pronouns of the First person (a) I, we, my, me, etc.
2. ఎదుటివానిని గురించి చెప్పునవి; Pronouns of the Second person() thou, you, your.
3. ఎక్కడో యున్న వానిని గురించి చెప్పునవి ; Pronouns of the Thrid person (38): he, she, it, they.
పై మూడింటి అభిప్రాయమును సూత్రరూపమున నిట్లు చెప్పవచ్చును. తానుత్తమ, ఎదుట మధ్యమ, ఎక్కడో ప్రథమ సూ

1st person2nd person.
Sin.PluralSin.Plural
Sub.IweSub.thou(you)you
Obj.meusObj.thee(you)you
PossmyourPossthy(you)your
mineoursthine(yours)yours

 

3rd person
MFN
Sin.Plural
Sub.hesheitthey
Obj.himheritthem
Posshishersitstheirs

Note : Nouns అన్నియు third person లో నుండును.

Read and Learn more Parts Of Speech

Pronouns Definition And Types with Examples in Telugu

2. Demonstative Pronouns
Rama’s pencils is good and I want that.
ఈ వాక్యములో that అనునది ఫలానా (Rama’s pencil) పెన్సిల్ అని చెప్పుచున్నది. గాన అది Demonstrative Pronoun అనబడును. ఉ: that, those, this, these, such etc.
Def: A Demonstrative Pronoun is one that points to some person or thing, or stands for some noun already referred to.

Note: This, that, these, those, such, other earwor ఇదివరలో Demonstrative adjectives అని చెప్పబడినవి. అట్లయిన వానికి వీనికి గల భేదమేమి ; ఈ మాటల తర్వాత nouns ఉండినవిగాని లేక లోపించినగాని, అవి Demonstrative adjectives అగును. ఉ: Iwant that book. That horse is mine. This book is better than that (book). When the words, this, that etc., qualify some noun expressed or understood, they are Demonstrative adjectives.

ఈ మాటల తర్వాత nouns లేకపోయి, ఆ మాటలతో వస్తువులను ప్రత్యక్షముగా కనబరచినగాని, ఆ మాటలు nouns కు బదులు వచ్చిన గాని, అవి Demonstrative Pronouns అనబడును. ఉ:
‘I want that’. ‘That is my horse’. “The air of the hills is cooler than that (the air) of the plain’.
When the words this, that etc. are not followed by nouns and point to some person or thing, or stand for some noun, they are Demonstrative Pronouns.
This, these సమీపమందున్న వస్తువులను కనపరుచుటకును that, those దూరమందున్న వస్తువులను కనపరచుటకును ఉపయోగపడును. 3. Relative Pronouns
Relative Pronouns ఎనిమిది గలవు.
1. who 2. whom 3. whose 4. which 5. that 6. what 7. as 8. but

Subjective casewhowhichthatwhatasbut
objective casewhomwhichthatwhatas
possesive casewhose(=of whose)who(=of which)whose

Note: Who, Whom, Whose
2. Which సాధారణముగా వస్తువులకును, జంతువులకును చెందును. (a) I broungt the book which you wanted. (b) This is the horse which won the race. 3. That మనుష్యులకును, వస్తువులకును కూడ చెందును. 4. What (=that which) 30 30.
5. As, but: ఇవి మనుష్యులకును, వస్తువులకును చెందును ఉ:-
He is not such a fool as I took him for. Read such books as are useful 330 Relative Pronouns 5 Adjective clause లను పరిశీలింతము.
Who
(a) ఈ క్రింది రెండు వాక్యములను కలిపి ఒక వాక్యముగా వ్రాయుము. (a) Once there lived a king.
(b) He had an only son.
రెండవ వాక్యములోని pronoun he మొదటి వాక్యములోని noun king నకు చెందియున్నది. అనగా రెండు వాక్యములు ఒక్కరిని గురించియే చెప్పుచున్నవి. రెండవ వాక్యములోని pronoun he, subjective case లో నుండుటచే, relative pronounకూడ subjective case లో నుండవలెను. అందుచే who అను రూపము వాడవలసియున్నది. కావున వానిలోని రెండు భావములను కలిపి ఒక వాక్యముగా నిట్లు వ్రాయవచ్చును.

Once there lived a king who had an only son.
who అను pronoun దాని వెనుకనున్న king అను noun కు చెందుటయే గాక, పై రెండు వాక్యములను కలుపుచున్నది.. కావున who అను మాటను Relative Pronoun అందురు.
ఈవాక్యములో who దాని వెనుకనున్న king అను noun కు చెందును. అందుచే who అను మాటకు king అను మాట antecedent (=anything going before)
Antecedent తర్వాత వెంటనే relative pronoun వచ్చును. Who-Rel. pronoun having for its antecedent the noun king and subject to the verb, had.
Def: A Relative” Pronoun is one which not only refers to the same noun or pronoun going before it, but joins two
sentences.
The noun or pronoun for which the Relative pronoun stands is called the Antecedent: so the Relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in number, gender and person; but it need not agree in case; e.g., It is I whom the teacher wanted to punish.
(b) (a) That is the boy.
(b) He stole my pen.
That is the boy who stole my pen.
Note: That is the boy who stole my pen.
(“నా కలము నపహరించిన బాలుడు అతడే) ఇంగ్లీషులో Adj. clause antecedent అయిన boy కు తరువాతను, తెలుగులో ఆ క్లాజు యొక్క అర్ధము బాలుడు అను పదమునకు వెనుకను వచ్చును. ఈ రెండు భాషల రచనలలో ఈ భేదము కలదు.

(c) (a) Some live in glass houses. Those who live in glass (b) Those should not throw houses should not throw stones.

Whom
A.(a) (a) I shall appoint the man. (1) I shall appoint the man (b) You recommended him. whom you recommended. రెండవ వాక్యములో pronoun him Objective case నుండుటచే Objective case లో నుండు Relative pronoun రూపమగు whom వాడవలయును.
(b) (a) You recommended a
man.
(b) He will be appointed.
(2) The man whom you recommended will be appointed.
Note: (1), (2) so whom Rel. pronoun having for its antecedent man and object of the verb recommended.
B. (a) (a) This is the candidate.
(b) I was talking about him.
(1) This is the candidate abount whom I was talking. or
(2) This is the candidate whom I was talking about.
Note (1), (2) whom Rel. pronoun having for its antecedent candidate, and object (or governed by) the preposi- tion about.
(b) (a) Napoleon is a general. (b) The world has not pro- duced a better general.
Napoleon is a general. than whom the world has not produced a better.
Note: Whom Rel. Pronoun having for its antecedent
general and object of the preposition than.
Whose
A. (a) (a) This is the gentleman.
(b) We borrowed his car.
This is the gentleman whose car we borowed.
రెండవ వాక్యములోని his అను pronoun, possessive case లో నుండుటచే, possessive case లో నుండు relative pronoun రూపమగు whose వాడవలెను Whose Relative pronoun having for its A triangle whose three sides are equal is called equilateral. antecedent gentleman; and qualifying the noun car. (b) (a) The three sides of a triangle are equal. (b) It is called equilateral. (c) (a) I bought a horse.
(b) One of its legs was hurt.
A. (a) (a) This is the horse. (b) It won the race.
won.
(a) The horse is his.
(b) It won the race.
That
I bought a horse one of whose legs was hurt.
(1) This is the horse that won the race.
(2) The horse that won the race is his (or) (3) It is his horse that won the race.
Note: (1), (2), (3) we That Rel. pron. subject of
B. (a) Here is the book.
(b) I bought it yesterday.
Here is the book that I
bought yesterday.
Note: (1) That Rel. pron. – object of bought.
Note:- (2) Here is the book that I bought it yesterday అనుట తప్పు. ఏలన bought కి object that ఉండనే ఉంది ; అందుచే it అనవసరము.
Note:- (3) Objective case
33 Rel. pronoun that లోపింపజేసి వాక్యమును ఇట్లుగూడ వ్రాయవచ్చును : Here is the book I bought yesterday. oues that so supply 3 construction చెప్పవలయును.
C. (a) This is the boy.
(1) This is the boy that I spoke of.
(b) I spoke of him.
(2) This is the boy I spoke of. Which
A. (a) Rama gave me a book.
(b) It is very good.
1) Rama gave me a book which is very good.
Note:- Book అను మాటతో ప్రారంభించి Complex sentences ఈ క్రింది మూడు విధములుగ గూడ వ్రాయవచ్చును. :
(1) This book which is very good was given by Rama. (2) The book which was given by Rama is very good. (3) The book which Rama gave me is very good.
Note:-(1), (2)
which Rel. pronoun subject of the
verbs (is, was, given),5 (3) 6 which Relative pronoun object
of gave.
B. (a) He bought four pens. (b) Two of them were
broken.
C. (a) The house is mine.
(b) I live in it.
He bought four pens two
of which (Or of which
two) were broken.
(1) The house in which
I live is mine.
or (2) The house that I live in is mine.
or (3) The house I live in is mine.
Note 1 :- సాధారణముగా which తో preposition వచ్చిన ఎడల ((i) లో వలె) మొదట preposition. తరువాత which పచ్చును.
Note 2:- That Preposition
es preposition, Adjective clause
What
A. (a) What have you written Show me what you have on the slate?
(b) Show me that. written on the slate.
Note: What – Rel. Pron. having for its antecedent that understood-object of have written. But for purposes of understanding the meaning of the sentence, we may replace what by that which, when the sen- tence reads-Show me that which you have written on the slate. B. (a) You tell him anything. He believes whatever you tell him.
(b) He believes it.
There is no rose but has a thorn (=
There is no rose that
But
(a) This is a rose.
(b) Every rose has a thorn.
has not a thorn).
ఇచట but = that not అని అర్ధము.
Note: But – Rel. Pron. having for its antecedent rose –
subject of has.
As
Read such books as are useful.
A. (a) Some books are useful.
(b) Read such books. and subject of are.
Note: As – Rel. Pron. having for its antecedent books,
B. (a) (a) This is the news.
(b) I did not expect such news.
The news is not such.
as I expected.
Note:- As-Rel. Pron. having for its antecedent such and object of expected.
(b) (a) I took him for a fool.
(b) He is not such a fool.
(c) (a) Great mountain ranges cannot block the electric signals.
(b) Such are the Alps.
He is not such a fool. as I took him for.
Great mountain ranges such as the Alps cannot block the electric signals.
Note: 1. Such great mountain ranges cannot block the electric signals-Principal Cl.
As the Alps (are) – Adj. Cl. qualifying ranges.

Note:- 2. As-Rel. Pron. having for its antecedent ranges and subjective complement of are (understood).
(D) (a) He will not believe that.
(b) He is not such a fool.
He is not such a fool as to believe that.
Note: 1. As (he would be) to believe that – Adj. Cl. qualifying fool.
Note :- 2. Such తరువాత as తప్ప మరే Rel. Pron. రాకూడదు.
E (a) I collected many flowers.
(b) I could not collect more.
I collected as many flowers as I could.
Note: 1. As Rel. Pron. object of could (collect)
Note : 2. As తరువాత 45 తప్ప మరే Rel. Pron రాకూడదు.
1. (a) (a) I told him a story last month.
(b) This story also is the same.
This is the same story as
(or that) I told him last month.
Note: Same as, that 33 Rel. Prons. రాకూడదు.
(b) (a) Circumstances changed.
The circumstances are not
(b) They are not the same now. the same now as (they were) before.
Note: As Rel. Pron. having for its antecedent same and a subjective complement of were (understood). 4. Interrogative Pronouns
Interrogative Pronouns అయిదు గలవు.
1. who 2. whom 3. whose 4. which 5. what

Who
Sub. case –                                                         Who broke the slate?
Whom do you punish?

Obj. case –                                                         To whom do you give the prize?

Whom are you talking about?
Poss. case-                                                         Whose is this house?

Which  
Sub. case-                                                          Which is your brother?

Which of these is your sister?
Which do you want?
Obj. case-                                                            Which of them do you like best?
In which of these houses do you live?
Sub. case-                                                             What is your name?
What do you want?
Obj. case –                                                           What is it made of?

Name :- ఈ క్రింది మూడు వాక్యముల అర్థభేదమును గుర్తించవలెను.
1. Who is he? What is his name?
2. Which is he?= Point out the man.
3. What is he? What is his employment?
5. Reflexive Pronouns
Reflexive Pronouns తొమ్మిది గలవు.
1. Myself 2. Ourselves 3. Thyself 4. Yourself 5. Your- selves 6. Himself 7. Herself 8. Itself 9. Themselves.
a Ist and 2nd personal pronouns as possessive case 35, 3rd personal pronouns as Objective case రూపములకును, ఏకవచనములో self ను, బహువచనములో selves లను చెప్పుటచేత ఏర్పడును.
ఈ pronouns ఒక పని యొక్క ఫలమును, ఆ పని చేయువాడే పొందినపుడు ఉపయోగింపబడును కాబట్టి అవి Reflexive Pronouns e. I hurt myself. He shut himself up in the room. Def. Reflexive Pronouns show that the action done by the subject turns back upon it.
N.B. A Reflexive pronoun so used is the object of a verb
and it is called the Reflexive Object.
Note-1. The verb avail must always be followed by a reflexive pronoun of as:-
Correct :-                                      I must avail myself of your kind offer.
I must avail of your kind offer.
Wrong:-                                        I must avail your kind offer.
Your kind offer must be availed of.

Note: 2. The verb enjoyed must be followed by an object or a reflexive pronoun.
Correct :-                                    (a) I enjoyed my last visit to Delhi.
(b) I enjoyed myself very much.
Wrong:-                                        I enjoyed very much.

Note: 3. To pose as means ‘to pretend to be’. So no
Correct                                        He is trying to pose as a millionaire.

Wrong                                        He is trying to pose himself as a millionaire.

reflexive object is necessary: as:

Note:- 4. Reflexive pronouns Emphasis 30 కూడా ఉపయోగించబడును. ఉదా – I myself did it. It was written by the teacher himself.
In ‘I myself did it’, myself is in the subj. case. put in apposition to I. In ‘It was written by the teacher himself, ‘himself’ is in the Obj. case, put in apposition ‘to teacher’
Thus when a reflexive pronoun is used for emphasis it may be either in the Subj. or Obj. case, and it is called an Emphatic pronoun.
6. Indefinite Pronouns
1. All were punished. 2. Some say he was drowned. 3. Nobody knows what happened. 4. Somebody has taken my book.
3o all, some, nobody, somebody e pronouns ఫలానిది యని సూచించకుండ ఏదో యొక మనుష్యుని గాని, వస్తులనుగాని. తెలియజేయుచున్నవి గాన, Indefinite pronouns అనబడును. ఉ any- one, someone, anybody, somebody, nobody, all, one, none, some, many.
Def:- Indefinite Pronouns refer to persons or things in a general way, but do not refer to any person or thing in particular.
7. Distributive Pronouns
Give one fruit to each of the boys. Give boys each one fruit. Give the boys one fruit each. Either of the boys must help him. Neither of the boys could do the sum. Je each, either, neither pronouns వస్తువులనుగాని, మనుష్యులను గాని ఒక్కొక్కటిగా తీసికొనబడునట్లు తెలియజేయుచున్నవి. అవి Distributive Pronouns అనబడును.
Def: A Distributive pronoun shows that things are taken one at a time.
N.B.- ఈ pronouns తర్వాత వచ్చు క్రియలును, సర్వనామములును ఏకవచనములో నుండవలెను. ఉదా : ‘Each of the boys have taken their books’ p. ‘Each of the boys has taken his book’ యుండవలెను.
8. Possessive Pronouns
Possessive case లో నుండు pronouns objectives కి సమానము. 55 356 mine, thine, hers, ours, yours, theirs o adjectives
వలె వాని తరువాత nouns ను తీసికొనజాలవు. కనుక యవి Possessive Pronouns యనబడును.
ఈ pronouns ఒక adjective కును ఒక noun కును సమానము. ఉదా: This book is mine యని యనవలెను. కాని This book is my book ; This is mine book యనకూడదు.
9. Reciprocal Pronouns
Rama and Krishna loved each other.
Boys should help one another. Jo each other, one another

pronouns
ఒకరికొకరు పరస్పరము ఒక పనిని చేయునట్లు తెలియజేయు చున్నవి. కావున అవి Reciprocal pronouns అనబడును.
Def-Reciprocal Pronouns denote mutual action.
Note: Each other ఇద్దరిని గురించి చెప్పునపుడును, one another ఇద్దరికంటే హెచ్చుమందిని గురించి చెప్పునప్పుడును, ఉపయోగింపబడును. The two men hated each other. The girls helped one another, కాని ఇపుడి భేదమునంతగా పాటించుటలేదు.
Ex. 24 B. Name the class to which each Pronoun in the following belongs :-
1. He loves his mother.
2. Either of the answers is correct.
3. Those who teach others teach themselves.
4. What is your name?
5. Whose is this pen?
6. This turn is yours.
7. Some of my friends were present, but I could not meet any of them.
8. If such is your behaviour, I shall have to send you away from the school.
9. Only a few of the boys attended the private class and so the others had to be punished.
10. Which of these is your brother?
11. They had each an umbrella.
12. I am satisfied with neither of the servants.
13. Many failed only a few worked the sum correctly.
14. They killed each other.
15. Classmates must help one another.
16. One must take care of one’s health.
17. This horse is mine.
18. Each of these has got an umbrella.
19. Where is the horse that I bought?
20. Anybody may compete for the prize.
21. Whom do you select?
Uses of that
That:- 1. ‘e’
demonstrative adjective;
That book is mine’ 2. ‘e’ a
Demonstra- tive pronoun; Conjunction;
“That is my book. 3.
‘I know that you are a good boy’. 4.
‘అటువంటి’ అని యర్థమిచ్చినపుడు Relative pronoun; ఉ: ‘The book that you lent is lost’ 5. ‘On which or in which’ or ‘at which’ e adverbial accusative; I remember the day that (=on which) he came.
But (1)’s’
Uses of But
eg
Co-ordinating Conjunction:-:- He is clever, but very lazy. (2) not(only) ‘Adverb &:-“There is but one god’. (3) ‘except’e Preposition & ‘I saw nobody but him’. (4) ‘that Negative Relative Pronouns :-‘There is
no rose but has a thorn’
N.B: For uses of But as (1) Subordinating Conjunction, (2) Noun and (3) Verb, see ‘Same word used as different Parts of Speech’ (Chapter X)
Ex. 25
(a) Point out the relative and Interrogative Pronouns in and give the construction of Relative Pronouns and Adjec- tival Clauses:
1. The boy, who came here yesterday, is gone.
2. Where is the horse that I bought?
3. Here comes the man whose foot was hurt.
4. Who has taken my pen?
5. This is the boy that beat the dog.
6. Who is the best boy in the class?
7. This is the book which I lost.
8. This is the boy whom I punished yesterday.
9. Do you understand what I say?
10. What do you see in the picture?
11. Here is the man whom you wanted to meet.
12. I shall give you what you want.
13. The news is not such as I expected.
14. I shall give you as much as you require.
15. Pens will be given to those who want them.
16. Whose umbrella is this? 1
7. Whom are the people talking about?
18. Thre goes the thief that stole my book.
19. I have found the knife that I lost.
20. Monkeys are animals which are mischievous.

(b) Correct the following:-

1. The bird who sings, is on the tree. 2. The man which I saw, was blind. 3. This is the house whom I bought. 4. The dog, who bit the child, is a mad dog. 6. It was my nephew which brouhgt him. 7. I have met the boy which spoke to you yesterday.
Ans- 1. which 2. whom 3. that 4. which 6. who.
Ex. 26
Fill in the blanks with Relative Pronouns:-
1. This is the girl…. read the book. 2. Bring me the horse Here is the man….. house was burnt. 4. …. I showed you. 3. Is this the umbrella? book is punished. 6. you brought. 5. The boy….. stole the Do you know the man….. foot was hurt. 7. I cannot hear you say. 8. The man….. you sent was a clever fellow. 9. Is this the girl ….. you wanted to marry? 10. Listen to…… ..I say. 11. Do you know….. he said? 12. This is the same boy….. I saw yesterday. 13. The fruit is not such….. you wanted. 14. John has as many dogs…. his father. 15. Punish such boys….. are wicked. 16. There is no man….. dies. 17. Trials such my son made cannot….. secure success for him. 18. Such tales he told us….. I had never heard before. 19. I owe no penny….. I cannot pay. 20. He saw a small hole in the dyke through… water was flowing. 21. Presently you see a house ….. walls are being built.
Ans: 1. who 2. which 3. whose 6. whose 7. what 8. whom 12. that 13. as 14. as 15. as 16. but 18. as 19. that 20. which 21. whose.
Ex. 27
Put suitable Relative Pronouns where understood:-
1. The man, I saw, is gone. 2. Have you seen the house we live in? 3. You are the man we want. 4. That is the very thing I was looking for. 5. He spent the little money he had. 6. This is the garden we had played in. 7. The gems he gave her are costly. 8. I am the monarch of all I survey. 9. This is the cook I spoke about. 10. Few and short were the prayers we said. 11. He told them the same story I have just told you. 12. There is no Hindu knows the story of Ramayana. 13. This is a usage construction defied Grammarians.
Ans: 1. whom 2. that 4. that 5. that 7. which 8. that 9. whom 11. as 12. but 13. whose.
Ex. 27 A
Complete the following sentences as shown below:-
e.g-I taught those boys who came to me.
1. I know the man who – 2. The cat drank the milk which– 3. He said this to the friend whom 4. This is 5. The boy who —- will the horse that—- the prize. 6. get The first thing that–is to clean the place. 7. The man whose —- cannot play tennis well. 8. Is the man (of)—-your uncle? 9. The house(in) —- is a very old one. 10. The house that — -in was built twenty years ago. 11. Is this the boy whose –? 12. Is that the man for—-? 13. The gentleman- of my teachers. 14. These fruits are not such as15. Where —- are the flowers—-? 16. I bought a house (for)—-. 17. He gave me a pen(with) —- 18. I have no such information —- 19.I do not believe stories such — 20. A polygon — is said to be equilateral.

Ans. 1. deceived me. 3. he trusted 5. stands first. 6. you should do. 7. sight is bad. 8. whom you spoke 9. which I reside. 11. purse was stolen. 12. whom you are waiting 13. that I talk to. 14. I wanted 15. the fragrance of which is very nice 16. which I paid twenty thousand rupees. 18. as you require. 19. as you tell. 20. whose sides are equal.

Ex. 27 B.
Combine the following sets by using relative pronouns :-

1. I like the book. It has many pictures.
2. This is the passenger. The policeman helped him.
3. The man came to our house. He is our Hindi teacher.
4. The girl is Sita. We saw her.
5. You said something. I could not understand it.
6. This is the boy. He helped me.
7. Rama’s mother is ill. He has applied for leave.
8. This is the choultry. Jack built it.
9. Certain things can- not be mended. They must be ended.
10. This is the boy. I want to talk to him.
11. This is the boy. His house was burnt.
12. This is the man. I spoke to you about him.
13. Last year this country exported more than five million yards of cloth. More than half of this went to Pakistan.
14. They are playing a game? What is the game?
15. Last week they were given an examination. They were not prepared for it.
16. She is to marry a Frenchman? Is that the Frenchman?
17. I sold my house to a man. That is the man.
18. The nineteenth century was called the age of machin- ery. Machinery came into use during that century.
19. The sun is far away. Our light comes from it.
20. He returned home or a certain day. I do not remember it.
21. These are plucked by labourers. Most of the labourers are women.
22. Something fell from my pocket. I do not know that.
23. The sun is regarded as a god. His rays give life to the earth.

Ans.- 5. I could not understand what you said. 7. Rama whose mother is ill, has applied for leave. 9. Things which can not be mended, must be ended. 12. This is the man about whom I spoke to you. 15. Last week they were given an examination for which they were not prepared. 16. Is that the Frenchman whom she is to marry. 20. I do not remember the day on which he returned home. 21. These are plucked by labourers most of whom are women. 23. The sun whose rays give life to the earth is regarded as a god.
Ex. 27 C.
Break up each of the following sentences in two sentences:
1. He believes whatever you tell him.
2. Did you eve hear such a story as he has told us?
3. Where are the joys that once the sages saw?
4. That is a nice hotel you have got yourself into.
5. I will do what I can to help you.
6. He is my teacher to whom I owe a great deal.
7. He is a friend who may be depended upon.
8. The man I trusted has disappointed me.
9. It is distance that lends beauty to the view.
10. Whoever comes is welcome.
11. Whom the Gods love die young.
12. Leaders such as Gandhi can always be trusted.
13. They have an interval of one hour after which they will continue the play.
14. The cave inside which Ali Baba found himself was large and well lighted.
15. The stories which are told about her may not be true.
16. Kalidas wrote many beautiful plays, of which the most famous is “Shakuntala”.

Ans.- 1. You tell him anything.
2. He believes it.
3.. He has told us a story.
4. . Did you ever hear such a story?
5. Once the sages saw joys.
6. Where are those joys?
7. He is my teacher.
8. To him I owe a great deal.
9. Some friends may be depended upon.
10. He is one such.
11. Distance lends beauty to the view.
12. Nothing. else does it.
13. Anybody may come. He is welcome.
14. Some die young.
15. Gods love those.
16. Kalidas wrote beautiful plays. “Shakuntala” is the most famous of them.